Cat. No. O008-E1-1
USER’S MANUAL
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
Thank you for choosing this 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner. Proper use and
handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will lengthen
product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.
NOTICE
1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.
2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your
OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt
to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death
and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals
you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.
S Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
S Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off.
(These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve
product performance.
Items to Check Before Unpacking
1. Check the following items before removing the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
from the package:
S Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?
S Has the product been damaged in shipping?
S Are any screws or bolts loose?
S Have all accessories been correctly delivered together with or attached to the product?
The accessory for the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner is the Safety Precautions only.
Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the customer.
Should there be any problems with this product, contact your nearest OMRON sales
representative.
2. Check the following items before removing the 3F88L-RS17/17T/15/15WResolver
from the package:
S Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?
S Has the product been damaged in shipping?
S Are any screws or bolts loose?
S Have all accessories been correctly delivered together with or attached to the product?
The accessories for the 3F88L-RS17/17T are one 3F88L-RL10 Coupling and one copy of
the user’s manual. The accessories for the 3F88L-RS15/15W are one 3F88L-RL6 Coupling and three mounting claws.
Should there be any problems with this product, contact your nearest OMRON sales
representative.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.
!
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation
for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
S Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the
product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines,
and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with
double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING
It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose
and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or
indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative
before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned applications.
Safety Precautions
General Warnings
! WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble the Unit while power is being supplied. Doing so may
result in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Do not touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may result
in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire
system in the event of Cam Positioner failure or error caused by external factors of
the Cam Positioner.
Faulty operations may result in serious accidents.
S Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be included in control circuits outside the Cam Positioner.
S The Cam Positioner turns OFF all outputs when its self-diagnostic function detects
an error (ERROR is OFF), when TRIG input turns ON, or when RESET input turns
ON. Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire system in such an event.
S The Cam Positioner output may remain ON or OFF due to damage to an output
transistor or for some other reason. Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire system in such an event.
General Precautions
! Caution
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of
incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines, momentary
power interruptions, or other causes.
! Caution
Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
! Caution
Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage
and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in locations where the power supply is unstable.
! Caution
Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring.
! Caution
Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests.
! Caution
Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Unit.
! Caution
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the Unit.
! Caution
Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring.
! Caution
Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation.
! Caution
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
! Caution
Thoroughly check all wiring before turning ON the power supply.
! Caution
Wire all connections correctly.
! Caution
Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines.
! Caution
Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
! Caution
Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to
discharge any static built-up.
! Caution
Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws
are tightened to the torque specified in the operation manual. For DIN track mounting, push the Cam Positioner forward until the lock snaps into place.
! Caution
Be sure that cables and other items with locking devices are properly locked into
place.
! Caution
Always turn OFF the power supply to the Unit before attempting any of the following.
S Assembling the Unit.
S Setting switches.
S Connecting cables or wiring the system.
S Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
! Caution
Thoroughly check the newly created cam programs, parameter settings, and switch
settings for proper execution before actually running them.
! Caution
Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the
following.
S Switching the operating mode of the Unit
S Origin compensation
S Switching the execution bank
! Caution
When installing the Unit, adjust the origin before starting operation.
! Caution
Be sure that the number of resolver rotations is always within the allowable range.
! Caution
When replacing the Unit, transfer all the parameters and cam programs from the old
Unit to the new Unit before restarting operation.
! Caution
Do not apply voltages to the input terminal in excess of the rated input voltage.
! Caution
Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminal or cam output connector in excess of the maximum switching capacity.
! Caution
Do not touch the terminals for one minute after the power is turned OFF.
Installation Precautions
! Caution
Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual.
! Caution
Do not install the Unit in the following locations.
S Locations subject to direct sunlight.
S Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
S Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
S Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
S Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
S Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
S Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing the Unit in the following locations.
S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
S Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
S Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
S Locations close to power supplies.
Conformance to EC Directives
H Applicable Directives
S EMC Directives
S Low Voltage Directive
Concepts
EMC Directives
EMC Directives stipulate that the system must comply with both EMS and EMI standards
(see the following note). Because OMRON devices are designed for installation in various
equipment or machines, they comply with the relevant EMC standards so that the equipment or machines can easily comply with the EMC standards. However, the systems used
by customers are diverse, and EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions
of the equipment or control panel in which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer
must, therefore, perform final checks to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility):
EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN50081-2
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC or 75 to 1,500 V DC
meet the required safety standards (EN61131-2).
Conformance to EC Directives
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner complies with EC Directives. To ensure that the system in which
the 3F88L-160/162 is installed complies with EC Directives, the following precautions must be observed.
1. The 3F88L-160/162 is defined as an in-panel device according to the Low-voltage Directive.
The 3F88L-160/162 must, therefore, be installed within a control panel.
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used as
I/O power supplies.
3. The 3F88L-160/162 conforms to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) in relation
to EMI. However, the radiated emission (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel, connected devices, wiring, and other conditions. The user
must, therefore, confirm that devices and the overall machinery conform to EC Directives.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-1 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-1-4 Selecting the Function Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-1-5 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-1-6 Initial Settings Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-1-7 Applied Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Name and Function of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-3-1 Display Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3-2 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3-3 Operation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3-4 Terminal Block and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-4 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-5 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-1 Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chapter 2. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1 System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Selecting the Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Selecting the Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Mounting the Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 System Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Standard Wiring Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Terminal Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 Resolver Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5 Cam Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-6 Connecting a Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-9
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-16
2-21
2-22
2-25
Chapter 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1 Nomenclature of Display and Operation Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Modes, Functions, and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Selecting Function Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Function Level Selection Setting (SET Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking (PRGM Mode/SET Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4 Resolver and Machinery Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-5 Origin Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-6 Start Operation (RUN Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-7 I/O Monitor Function (RUN Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-8 Control I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-4
3-12
3-12
3-14
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-24
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-40
3-42
Table of Contents
3-6 Applied Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Function Level Selection Setting (SET Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Parameter List (SET Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Parameter Explanation and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-5 Backlash Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-6 Advance Angle Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-7 Cam Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-8 One-direction Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-9 Output Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-10 Present Value Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-11 Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-12 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-13 Copy Function (Data Transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-14 Trial/Adjustment Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-44
3-44
3-45
3-49
3-56
3-60
3-62
3-69
3-75
3-77
3-78
3-80
3-83
3-88
3-93
Chapter 4. Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1 Overview of CompoWay/F Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Command and Response Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Command Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Response Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Memory Area Read (RUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Parameter Area Read/Write (SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Controller Data Read (RUN, PRGM, SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 Unit Attribute Read (RUN, PRGM, SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-5 Controller Status Read (RUN, PRGM, SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-6 Operation Command (RUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-7 Internode Echo Test (RUN, PRGM, SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Executing CompoWay/F Commands with Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-5
4-5
4-7
4-10
4-10
4-12
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
Chapter 5. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Diagnosis using Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
CompoWay/F Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Cam Positioner Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Chapter 6. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
Cam Positioner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolver Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Block Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-4
6-6
6-8
Chapter 7. Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Resolver Life Expectancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Table of Contents
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Displays by Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Programming Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Settings Log Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12
7-16
7-21
7-22
I-1
R-1
1
Chapter 1
Outline
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Functions
System Configuration
Name and Function of Each Part
Glossary
Operation Procedure
Outline
1-1
Chapter 1
Functions
The 3F88-L160 and 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners are Units that detect angles through a
Resolver (a sensor that detects absolute angles) and turn output signals ON and OFF at
a preset angle through a cam program.
The 3F88L-160 Cam Positioner has 16 cam output points and the 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner has 32 cam output points.
1-1-1 Basic Operation
• Input a cam program (the ON/OFF pattern for cam outputs) into the Cam Positioner, use the bank
switching signal to select the bank number, and turn ON the operation signal to start operation.
Resolver angle
0°
90°
180°
270°
0°
Cam output 1
Cam output 2
Cam output 3
(Programming example for 360 resolution)
Cam output
Cam Program (Bank No. 1)
Cam No. Step ON angle OFF angle
1
2
2
3
---
1
1
2
1
---
90
315
135
0
---
180
45
225
45
---
Cam Program (Bank No. 2)
Cam Program (Bank No. 3)
-----
Resolver
User machine or
device
Cam Positioner
Control input
Bank switching signal (Bank numbers 1 to 3)
Operation signal (START)
1-1-2 Resolution
• The angle resolution can be set to 360 (divisions/revolution) or 720 (divisions/revolution).
• The following table shows how functions and performances are affected by resolution settings.
Function or Characteristic
Angle setting and display units
Permissible Resolver speed
No. of cam program steps
Number of banks
360 resolution
1° is set and displayed as “1.”
1,600 r/min
180 max.
8
720 resolution
0.5° is set and displayed as “1.”
800 r/min
360 max.
4
Note For example, to set the ON angle at 90°, the setting is “90” for a 360 resolution and “180” for a 720
resolution.
1-2
Outline
Chapter 1
1-1-3 Modes
• The 3F88-L160 and 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners have three modes: RUN, PRGM, and SET. These
are set using the mode selection switch on the front of the Unit. The functions of each mode are outlined below. (Refer to 3-2 Mode, Functions, and Display.)
RUN mode: Operation and compensation.
PRGM mode: Creation, editing, deletion, and trial operation of cam programs.
SET mode: Unit parameters and various compensation value settings, teaching, and communications settings.
1-1-4 Selecting the Function Level
• Three function levels are available to limit Cam Positioner functions. (Refer to 3-4 Selecting Function
Levels.)
Function Level 0 (Monitor Only)
Cam output and monitoring are enabled. Cam programs are write protected and parameter settings
cannot be made. This function level is designed to prevent inadvertent changes to the cam program
or parameters.
Function Level 1 (Basic Operation/Monitor Only)
In addition to the functions available at function level 0, cam programs may be edited. This function
level is used for basic operation.
Function Level 2 (All Functions)
All Cam Positioner functions are enabled. This function level is for using applied functions.
1-1-5 Basic Functions
H Cam Program Write Function
• Cam programs set the angle at which the cam output is turned ON and OFF. Up to 180 steps can be set
and up to 8 banks registered for 360 resolution and up to 360 steps and 4 banks for 720 resolution can
be set for each cam output point. (Refer to 3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking.)
• Cam programs are normally input by using the operation keys on the front of the Unit but settings can
be made from a personal computer by using a special communications protocol (CompoWay/F). (Refer to Chapter 4 Communications.)
Note 1. A step is one ON/OFF combination for one cam.
Note 2. A bank is a program unit made up of cam outputs 1 to 32 for the 3F88L-162 and cam outputs 1
to 16 for the 3F88L-160. By changing the bank, the program that will be operated will change.
H Cam Output
• While START input is ON, this function turns cam outputs ON and OFF in the bank specified at BANK
input according to the ON/OFF angles set for each cam.
H Monitor
• Monitors cam output and control I/O status. (Refer to 3-5-7 I/O Monitor Function.)
1-3
Outline
Chapter 1
H Data Save
• Saves parameters and cam programs in non-volatile memory (EEPROM). As the data is stored in
non-volatile memory, battery replacement, and other maintenance is not required.
H Program Number Check
• The number of programs and origin compensation angle can be checked. (Refer to 3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking.)
1-1-6 Initial Settings Functions
H Switching Resolution
• Switches between 360 and 720 divisions per Resolver revolution. (Refer to 3-5-2 Initial Settings.)
H Changing Rotation Direction
• Sets the direction of increasing angle to suit the mechanical configuration. (Refer to 3-5-2 Initial Settings.)
1-1-7 Applied Functions
H Origin Compensation
• Sets any angle to 0° according to the mechanical origin. (Refer to 3-6-4 Origin Compensation and
Origin Shift.)
H Origin Shift
• Sets any angle to 0° according to the mechanical origin when the trigger turns ON in RUN mode. (Refer to 3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift.)
H Backlash Compensation
• Sets a difference between the detection angles in CW and CCW directions to absorb mechanical
vibration. (Refer to 3-6-5 Backlash Compensation..)
H Advance Angle Compensation
• Advances the cam output angle in proportion to the number of Resolver revolutions. (Refer to 3-6-6
Advance Angle Compensation.)
H Cam Protect
• Protects each bank and cam to prevent the cam ON/OFF data being inadvertently changed or deleted.
H One-direction Function Setting
• Enables cam output in one rotational direction only. (Refer to 3-6-8 One-direction Function.)
1-4
Outline
Chapter 1
H Output Hold Function
• Holds the immediately preceding cam output status when the user switches to PRGM mode or when
there is an error. (Refer to 3-6-9 Output Hold Function.)
H Present Value Output Function
• Uses the cam output signal and outputs the signal to the Display Unit (M7E, M7F, or other Display
Units.) The present angle or number of revolutions can be displayed on the Display Unit. (Refer to
3-6-10 Present Value Output Function.)
H Pulse Output Function
• Automatically sets data that turns ON and OFF at regular intervals in a desired bank or cam in order to
edit memory contents. (Refer to 3-6-11 Pulse Output Function.)
H Teaching
• The Resolver angle data may be input as cam program settings during manual operation of the
machinery. (Refer to 3-6-12 Teaching.)
H Copy Function
• By making the settings for one Cam Positioner, the cam program, the various compensation values,
and settings in one operation may be copied to another Cam Positioner.
H Trial Operation
• When adjusting the ON/OFF angles to suit the machinery, performs cam output and changes the ON/
OFF angle in real time regardless of the control input signal status. (Refer to 3-6-14 Trial/Adjustment
Operation.)
H Compensation Operation
• When adjusting the ON/OFF angles to suit the machinery, changes the ON/OFF angles in real time
while in operation status (cam output status). (Refer to 3-6-14 Trial/Adjustment Operation.)
H Communications Function
• Has a communications port that conforms to shape B in CompoWay/F. Communications can be used
to read and write cam programs and monitor present angles and number of revolutions. (Refer to
Chapter 4 Communications.)
Note CompoWay/F is a uniform procedure in OMRON serial communications. CompoWay/F has uniform frame formats and commands that conform to FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) that
is used in OMRON PCs. It facilitates easier communications between multiple components and
between personal computers and components.
1-5
Outline
1-2
Chapter 1
System Configuration
Control Section
Output Section
SYSMAC CS1-series PC or other PC
Cam
output
signal
Control I/O signal
SYSMAC CS1-series PC or other PC
G7TC-OC16 I/O Block
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner
Detection Section
M7E or M7F Display Unit
3F88L-RS17, 3F88L-RS17T, 3F88L-RS15,
or 3F88L-RS15W Resolver
1-6
Note Refer to 2-3 Wiring or 7-4 Standard
Models for information on various
connection cables.
Outline
1-3
Chapter 1
Name and Function of Each Part
11. Cam output
connector (top)
1. Bank/Function
display
2. Cam/Parameter
No. display
5. Mode selection
switch
6. P⋅ CLR switch
7. ADJ switch
8. CW/CCW setting
switch
Mounting hole
12. Communications port
10. Resolver
connector
9. Operation keys
13. Terminal block
(under the cover)
Mounting hole
4. POSITION/OFF
(Present angle/
OFF angle) display
5. SPEED/ON
(Number of revolutions/ON angle)
display
1-7
Outline
Chapter 1
1-3-1 Display Section
• Displays the operation status, error status, and settings data.
• The data displayed will differ depending on the mode.
Name
1. Bank and function display
p y
2. Cam and parameter
number display
p y
3. Number of revolutions and
ON angle
l display
di l
4. Present angle
g and OFF
angle
l display
di l
Mode
RUN
PRGM
SET
RUN
PRGM
SET
RUN
PRGM
SET
RUN
PRGM
SET
Display
Display the number of the operating bank.
Display the number of the bank being programmed.
Display the number of the function being set.
Displays “ru” when the START signal is ON and is blank
when the START signal is OFF.
Displays the number of the cam being programmed.
(Different for different settings functions.)
Displays the number of revolutions or an error message.
Displays the ON angle or an error message.
(Differs for different settings functions.)
Displays the present angle.
Displays the OFF angle.
(Different for different settings functions.)
1-3-2 Switches
Name
5. Mode selection switch
---
6. P ⋅ CLR switch
PRGM
7. ADJ switch
SET
8. CW/CCW setting switch
When power is turned ON
1-8
Mode
Function
Switches between the three operation
modes: RUN, PRGM, and SET.
Deletes all cam programs in the Cam
Positioner.
Adjusts the compensation by executing
origin compensation.
Changes the rotation direction. The direction of increasing angle is set to either CW
(clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise)
when viewed from the Resolver axle side.
Outline
Chapter 1
1-3-3 Operation Keys
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
ON/
OFF
CLR
SET
Name
Bank/Function Key
Mode
PRGM/SET
Function
Increases bank and function numbers.
Cam/Parameter Key
---
Increases cam and parameter numbers.
ON/OFF Switching Key
---
Switches between ON and OFF angles.
Up Key
---
Increases the numeral that is flashing.
Down Key
---
Decreases the numeral that is flashing.
Forward Key
---
Changes the digit of the numeral to be set.
Clear Key
---
Clears data.
Set Key
---
Saves input data.
1-3-4 Terminal Block and Connectors
Name
10. Resolver connector
11. Cam output connector
12. Communications port
13. Terminal block
Function
Connects to the Resolver cable connector.
Used for cam output.
CompoWay/F communications connector (connects to a personal computer
and other Cam Positioners) (9-pin D-sub connector)
Power input, control input, and control output terminals.
1-9
Outline
1-4
Chapter 1
Glossary
Term
Cam output
Cam program
Cam protect
Compensation operation
Origin compensation
Origin shift
Origin value
Resolver
Trial operation
Meaning
Cam output consists ON/OFF outputs for the Resolver angle according to
the ON/OFF angles set by the user (the cam program).
A cam program consists ON/OFF angle data set by the user.
The cam data protect function protects the cam ON/OFF data from being
inadvertently changed or deleted.
When in RUN mode, this function can be used to adjust the cam output ON
and OFF angles by using the operation keys in order to check mechanical
operation.
When in SET mode, the mechanical origin and the Resolver origin can be
aligned by pressing the ADJ switch on the front of the Cam Positioner.
When in RUN mode, this function can be used to temporarily shift the
displayed angle to the origin by shorting the TRIG terminal with the 0-V
terminal.
The origin value is a value set as the origin of the Resolver. This value can
be set to any angle when origin compensation or origin shift has been
performed. The default setting is 0.
The Resolver is a sensor that detects the absolute angle. One of four
Resolver models (3F88L-RS17, 3F88L-RS17T, 3F88L-RS15, and
3F88L-RS15W) can be selected for 3F88L-160 and 3F88L-162 Cam
Positioners.
When in PRGM mode, this function can be used to adjust the cam output
ON and OFF angles by using the operation keys in order to check
mechanical operation.
The greatest difference from compensation operation is the ability to adjust
the ON and OFF angles of any bank or cam number without any external
control signal input during trial operation.
1-10
Outline
1-5
Chapter 1
Operation Procedure
1-5-1 Before Operation
H Basic Use
• The procedure for using the Cam Positioner at function level 1 (basic operation/monitor only) is outlined below.
Procedure
Installation
Wiring
Power ON
Contents
Install the Cam Positioner according to the installation
environment conditions.
Connect the wiring for the power supply, Resolver, and
peripheral devices.
Before the power is turned ON:
Reference
section
2-2
2-3
• Check that the wires and connectors for the Resolver and
peripheral devices have been connected properly.
• Check that the Resolver and the machinery are not connected.
After the power is turned ON:
• Check that there are no error codes displayed (E--**).
Function level selection
Initial settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Creation and confirmation
of cam programs
Connection between
Resolver and machinery
Execution of origin
compensation
Operation/monitoring
Function level selection
• Set the mode selection switch to RUN and check that the
number of revolutions and the present angle display changes
when the Resolver axis is rotated by hand.
Select function level 1 (basic operation/monitor only).
3-5-1
3-5-2
Set the resolution (SET mode) and rotation direction
(CW/CCW) to suit the application.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
Create and check cam programs (PRGM mode).
Check the number of programs (SET mode).
Turn OFF the power and connect the Resolver and the
machinery.
Turn ON the power and execute origin compensation (use
the ADJ switch in SET mode).
Change to RUN mode and check the operation of the
machinery and monitor the I/O status. Correct the cam
program if required (PRGM mode).
If required, set to function level 0 (monitor only) to prevent
faulty operation.
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-4
Note This procedure is applicable when only the basic functions (function level 1) are used. In the
cases outlined below, the applied functions (function level 2) must be used. (Refer to 3-6 Applied
Functions.)
S When setting origin compensation values, using backlash compensation, advance angle compensation, and other compensation functions.
S When executing a trial or compensation operation.
1-11
Outline
Chapter 1
S When using the teaching function.
S When making pulse output, cam data protect, output hold, one-direction function, and present
value output settings.
H Applied Functions
• The procedure for using the Cam Positioner at function level 2 (all functions) is outlined below.
Procedure
Installation
Wiring
Power ON
Contents
Install the Cam Positioner according to the installation
environment conditions.
Connect the wiring for the power supply, Resolver, and
peripheral devices.
Before the power is turned ON:
Reference
section
2-2
2-3
• Check that the wires and connectors for the Resolver and
peripheral devices have been connected properly.
• Check that the Resolver and the machinery are not connected.
After the power is turned ON:
• Check that there are no error codes displayed (E--**).
Function level selection
Initial settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Parameter settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Creation and confirmation
of cam programs
Connection between
Resolver and machinery
Execution of origin
compensation
Teaching
Trial operation
Operation/monitoring
Origin shift execution
Compensation operation
Function level selection
1-12
• Set the mode selection switch to RUN and check that the
number of revolutions and the present angle display changes
when the Resolver axis is rotated by hand.
Select function level 2 (all functions).
3-6-1
3-5-2
Set the resolution (SET mode) and rotation direction
(CW/CCW) to suit the application.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
Make the parameter settings.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
3-6-2 and 3-6-3
Create and check cam programs (PRGM mode).
Check the number of programs (SET mode).
Turn OFF the power and connect the Resolver and the
machinery.
Turn ON the power and execute origin compensation (use
the ADJ switch in SET mode).
If required, use the teaching function (SET mode) and create
a cam program while operating the machinery manually.
Change to PRGM mode, and, if required, adjust the cam
program while checking the timing of the cam output.
Change to RUN mode and check the operation of the
machinery and monitor the I/O status. Correct the cam
program if required (PRGM mode).
If required, turn ON TRIG input and execute origin shift
(RUN mode).
If required, adjust the cam program while checking the timing
of the cam output.
If required, set to function level 0 (monitor only) to prevent
faulty operation.
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-6-12
3-6-14
3-5-6
3-6-4
3-6-14
3-4
2
Chapter 2
Design
2-1
2-2
2-3
System Design
Installation
Wiring
Design
2-1
Chapter 2
System Design
! WARNING
Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire
system in the event of Cam Positioner failure or error caused by factors external to
the Cam Positioner.
Faulty operation may result in a serious accident.
S Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be included in control circuits outside the Cam Positioner.
S The Cam Positioner turns OFF all outputs when its self-diagnostic function detects
an error (ERROR is OFF), when TRIG input turns ON, or when RESET input turns
ON. Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire system in such an event.
S The Cam Positioner output may remain ON or OFF due to damage to an output
transistor or for some other reason. Take safety measures outside the Cam Positioner to ensure safety for the entire system in such an event.
2-1-1 Selecting the Resolver
There are four Resolver models available. Select the Resolver suitable for the application.
H Resolvers
Type
Model
Axle diameter
Rated axle load
Total length
Attachment
method
Friction torque
Connection to
Cam Positioner
Large-diameter
High-torque
3F88L-RS17
3F88L-RS17T
10 mm
Thrust load: 196 N max.
Connector
Lead-wire
3F88L-RS15
3F88L-RS15W
6 mm
Thrust load: 98N max.
Radial load: 196 N max.
101 mm
110 mm
Flange
Radial load: 98 N max.
154 mm
97 mm
Connected to the servo.
12 mN S m max.
49 to 147 mN S m
Shown in diagram A.
2.9 mN S m max.
Shown in diagram
B.
Note High-torque Resolvers have oil seals.
2-2
Shown in diagram
C.
Design
Chapter 2
H Cam Positioner and Resolver Configuration
A
3-m Plug-in cable
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjC
Resolver Extension Cable
B
3F88L-RS17/-RS17T
Resolver
Connector type
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjNA
Resolver Cable
C
3F88L-RS15 Resolver
35-cm Separate wire
plug-in cable
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjSA
Resolver Cable
3F88L-RS15S Resolver
Note 1. 3F88-RS17 and 3F88-RS17T Resolvers have 3-m cables. Use the 3F88L-CRjjjC Resolver Extension Cable if more cable is required.
Note 2. The jjj in the Extension Cable model number indicates the length of the Extension Cable.
For example, the 3F88L-CR010C Extension Cable is 10 m in length.
Note 3. The distance between the Cam Positioner and the Resolver can be up to 100 m.
2-3
Design
Chapter 2
2-1-2 Selecting the Output Device
Select the device and connection method for ON/OFF outputs from the Cam Positioner. (Refer to 2-3
Wiring for information on connecting output devices.)
H For Relay Output
Use an I/O Block for relay output.
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CGjjjN
Cam Output Cable
G7TC-OC16
I/O Block
H For Transistor (Open Collector) Output
Use the outputs straight from the Cam Output Cable.
Open collector output
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
H For Mostly Relay Output with Some Open Collector Output
Use an I/O Block and use an Output Short-circuit Module to give some open collector output.
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
2-4
3F88L-CGjjjN
Cam Output Cable
G7TC-OC16
I/O Block
Output
Short-circuit
Module
Design
Chapter 2
H To Display Present Angles and Other Data on a Display Unit
Connect a M7E or M7F Display Unit to the Cam Output Cable.
3F88L-160 or 3F88L-162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
M7E or M7F Display Unit
Note Parameters must be set to output present values. The present value output and cam output terminals will be shared which means that some cam output signals can no longer be used.
2-5
Design
2-2
Chapter 2
Installation
2-2-1 External Dimensions
Note All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
H 3F88L-160 and 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners
101±0.2
91± 0.2
Two, 4.5 dia.
• When the Resolver
Cable is connected
2-6
Design
Chapter 2
H Resolvers
50 ± 0.3 dia.
28±0.5
72 (81) (see note)
40 dia.
35+0/--0.05 dia.
Four, 4.5 dia.
10--0.005/--0.017 dia.
D 3F88L-RS17 and 3F88L-RS17T
OMRON XM2A-1501
15-pin D-sub Plug
8.6 dia.
Approx. 3 m
8.6 dia.
OMRON XM2D-1501
15-pin D-sub Socket
Note The dimensions in parentheses are for the 3F88L-RS17T Resolver.
16.5±0.5
65 max.
39 dia.
6--0.004/--0.016 dia.
33.32+0/--0.05
43 dia.
D 3F88L-RS15
Hirose RM15WTP-10S-(8)
Connector
Hirose RM15WTR-10P
Connector
2-7
Design
Chapter 2
16.5±0.5
16
max. 350 max.
39 dia.
6--0.004/--0.016 dia.
33.32+0/--0.05
43 dia.
D 3F88L-RS15W
2-2-2 Installation Environment
Take precautions with the installation environment to improve the reliability and to fully
utilize the functions of the Cam Positioner system.
H Do not install the Unit in the following locations.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures or relative humidities outside the following ranges.
Ambient temperature: 0° to 55°C (Cam Positioner Unit) and --10° to 80°C (Resolver)
Ambient humidity: 10 to 90 % (with no condensation).
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
H Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing the
Unit in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
2-8
Design
Chapter 2
H Conformance to EC Directives
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner complies with EC Directives. To ensure that the system in which
the 3F88L-160/162 is installed complies with EC Directives, the following precautions must be observed.
• The 3F88L-160/162 is defined as an in-panel device according to the Low-voltage Directive. The
3F88L-160/162 must, therefore, be installed within a control panel.
• Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used as I/O power
supplies.
• The 3F88L-160/162 conforms to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) in relation to EMI.
However, the radiated emission (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel, connected devices, wiring, and other conditions. The customer must, therefore, confirm
that devices and the overall machine conform to EC Directives.
2-2-3 Mounting the Resolver
Use the Resolver Coupling to connect the Resolver to the machinery. This Coupling protects the Resolver from vibrations and shocks from the machinery.
H Mounting Method
D 3F88L-RS17/17T (Flange-mounted)
• Recommended
mounting holes
• Mounting example
Four, M4
screws
Four, M4-screws
35+0.025/+0.009
dia.
50 dia.
50 ± 0.3 dia.
3-mm sheet min.
2-9
Design
Chapter 2
D 3F88L-RS15/15W (Servo-mounted)
• Recommended
mounting hole
• Mounting example
Three, M4 screws
(Evenly spaced around
circumference)
33.332+0.025/+0.009
dia.
52 dia.
52 dia.
67 dia.
3-mm sheet min.
• Mounting hook (Resolver attachment)
4.4 dia.
H Connecting with the Coupling
As a rule, the Resolver Coupling should be used when connecting the Resolver to the machinery. The
Coupling will break near the center if 1.7 to 2 times the rated tightening torque is applied and, therefore,
protects the Resolver from excessive torque.
Keep the axle center displacement and bend angle of the Coupling within the specifications when
mounting.
D Coupling Specifications
3F88LCouplings
Dimensions (mm)
3F88LResolvers
D dia.
E dia.
L
P
A
B
C
Max.
bend
angle
θ1 (see
note 2)
Axle center displace
placement
Rated tightening
torque
+20°C
+80°C
Screw sets
Size
t1 (see
note 3)
Tightening
torque
RL10
RS17/RS17J
10
22
26.2
19
3.6
7.1
12
10°
max.
1.0 mm
max.
2.94
NSm
1.76
NSm
M4 × 6
0.44
NSm
RL6
RS15/RS15W
6
15
22
16.4
2.8
5.5
11
10°
max.
1.2 mm
max.
0.98
NSm
0.58
NSm
M3 × 4
0.24
NSm
Note 1. The Coupling is made from 25% Duracon glass fiber.
2-10
E dia.
D dia.
Hexagonal set screw
Design
Chapter 2
Note 2. Maximum bend angle
Θ1
Note 3. Axle center displacement
t1
D Precautions when Connecting with the Coupling
Take the following precautions when connecting the Resolver to the machinery via the Coupling.
• Make sure the axle center does not protrude into the area marked C in the diagram. If the axle center is
protruding when the Resolver rotates, the Coupling will no longer function and the machinery may be
damaged.
• If the bend angle or displacement of the axle center is large, the life of the Coupling will be shortened
and the accuracy of the Resolver rotation angle will be adversely affected.
Mechanical axle center
Resolver axle center
H Connecting without the Coupling
Give sufficient consideration to the load that will be applied to the Resolver axle if it is connected to the
machinery without the Coupling. Make sure the applied load will be below the rated load.
D Rated Resolver Axle Load
Model
Rated axle load
3F88L-RS17
3F88L-RS17T
Thrust load: 196 N max.
3F88L-RS15
3F88L-RS15W
Thrust load: 98 N max.
Radial load: 196 N max.
Radial load: 98 N max.
Thrust load (load
parallel to the axle)
Radial load (load
perpendicular to
the axle)
2-11
Design
Chapter 2
D Connection Examples
Using a Timing Belt
A pulley is attached directly onto the Resolver axle and connected to a rotating machinery by a timing
belt.
In this case, the load on the axle is the tension on the timing belt and the weight of the pulley.
Timing belt
Resolver
Using Gears
Pitch errors, total alignment errors, and other gear errors apply a repeated load in the radial direction.
Gear
Resolver
Using Chains
A sprocket can be attached directly to the Resolver axle and the axle then connected to a rotating
machinery with a chain.
The weight of both the sprocket and the chain will be a load on the axle. Rattles in the sprocket and chain
will become shock loads applied to the axle when machine movement stops and starts.
Chain
Resolver
2-12
Design
2-3
Chapter 2
Wiring
2-3-1 System Connection Diagram
G7TC-OC16 I/O Block
SYSMAC CS1 or other
Programmable Controller
Display Units
M7E
M7F
3F88L-CGjjjN
Cam Output Cable
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
Cam Output Connector
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
Resolver Connection Cables
3F88L-CRjjjC
Resolver Extension Cable
3F88L-RS17/-RS17T Resolver
3F88L-CRjjjNA
Resolver Cable
3F88L-RS15 Resolver
3F88L-CRjjjSA
Resolver Cable
3F88L-RS15W Resolver
2-13
Design
Chapter 2
2-3-2 Standard Wiring Method
The number of man hours required for wiring will be reduced and the reliability of the Unit
will be improved if OMRON Cables are used.
Give sufficient consideration to noise countermeasures when wiring
H Using Connection Cables
Use the following Cables to connect the Unit to peripheral devices. Always use OMRON Cables when
connecting the Resolver, in particular, to ensure reliability of the Unit.
Peripheral device
to be connected
Resolver
Cable name
Resolver Cable
I/O Block
Cam Output Cable
PC or similar device Cam Output Cable
(for cam output)
Display Unit
Cam Output Cable
Model
Remarks
3F88L-CRjjjC
3F88L-CRjjjNA
3F88L-CRjjjSA
3F88L-CGjjjN
3F88L-CGjjjS
Extension Cable for 3F88L-RS17/-RS17T
Cable for 3F88L-RS15
Cable for 3F88L-RS15W
Connectors at both ends.
Connector on one end.
3F88L-CGjjjS
Connector on one end.
Note The jjj in the cable model numbers indicates the length of the cable. Refer to 7-4 Standard
Models for details.
H Wiring for Improved Noise Resistance
The noise resistance of the system can be improved by the wiring method. The following points must be
given attention when wiring.
D Connection Method
Control panel
Power
device
AC power
supply
Control
device
Surge
absorber
Insulation
transformer
Noise filter
Control
power
supply
Resolver
Cam
Positioner
Ground board
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
2-14
If metal ducted
2.0 mm2 ground min.
Design
Chapter 2
• Use a ground board as shown in the diagram and ground (FG) each Unit to one point on the ground
board.
• Do not bundle the ground together with the power supply, motor drive, or Resolver signal wires or run
the ground through the same duct as these wires.
• If using metal conduit or running wires through metal duct, ground the metal to one point.
Note To make the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner conform to EC Directives, be sure to install the Unit
within a control panel.
D External Wiring
• Use a different cable for the Cam Positioner I/O and the control wire. Do not run these wires through
the same cable.
• It is recommended that the Cam Positioner cables and other control and power cables are wired as
shown below.
• Parallel cable racks must be a minimum of 300 mm apart.
• If multiple terminals are to be housed in one duct, shield the terminals with a grounded conductive
plate.
Low-current
cable
Conductive
plate (steel)
1
1. Resolver cable
2
300 mm min.
Control cable
3
2. Cam Positioner input cable
3. Cam Positioner power supply cable
General control cable
300 mm min.
Power cable
4. Power cable
4
Ground to 100 Ω or less
Conductive
plate (steel)
1
2
3
4
200 mm min.
Ground to 100 Ω or less
Note The 3F88L-160/162 conforms to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) in relation to
EMI. However, the radiated emission (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel, connected devices, wiring, and other conditions. The customer must,
therefore, confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EC Directives.
H Points to Consider when Wiring to Peripheral Devices
• Install a surge absorber and noise filter on the AC power supply input wiring.
• Pay attention to the following points when using relays, electromagnetic valves, and other noise-generating devices.
S Separate noise-generating devices, parts and the wiring as much as possible.
S Use a separate power supply system.
2-15
Design
Chapter 2
S Use a separate grounding system.
S Attach a surge absorber or diode to the device or parts generating the noise, as shown in the following diagram.
AC relays or AC valves
AC
power
supply
DC relays
Surge absorber
~
DC
power
supply
Diode
Note Select withstand pressure and current suitable for the load.
2-3-3 Terminal Block Wiring
Use crimp terminals and firmly tighten to the appropriate torque.
H Terminal Block Layout
Power supply input
Function
Earth
Control input
Control output
Protect
Earth
H Power Supply Input Wiring
D Wiring Method
Func- Protect
tion
Earth
Earth
100 to 240 V AC
50/60 Hz
2-16
~
Ground to 100 Ω
or less
Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 0.8 N S m
Design
Chapter 2
D Terminal Functions
Terminal name
Symbol
Main circuit power supply
input terminal
AC1/L
AC2/N
Function earth terminal
Protect earth terminal
Function
Inputs the AC power supply for the Cam
Positioner. Provide a 100 to 240 V AC
50/60 Hz power supply. (Rated power
supply voltage 85 to 264 V AC)
This is the primary ground terminal
connected for the power supply.
This is the frame ground terminal.
Recommended
connection wire
diameter
1.25 mm2
2.0 mm2
2.0 mm2
Note 1. Use M3.5 round crimp terminals for AC 1/L and AC 2/N terminals.
Note 2. Use M3.5 round or forked crimp terminals for function earth and protect earth terminals.
• Round crimp terminal
7 mm max.
• Forked crimp terminal
7 mm max.
Note If the power supply voltage of the Cam Positioner slowly increases or decreases at less than 85%
of the rated voltage (i.e., less than 85 V), operation may stop intermittently. If this affects the operation of equipment, provide protective circuits that interrupt output enough to cause the voltage
to increase to more than 85% of the rated value.
H Control Input Wiring
D Wiring Method
24 V DC
Terminal screw size: M3
Tightening torque: 0.5 N S m
2-17
Design
Chapter 2
D Terminal Functions
Terminal
name
Function
Symbol
Recommended
connection
wire diameter
1.25 mm2
Control I/O
power
supply
l
24 V
The control I/O power supply terminal is used for the power
supplyy for control I/O.
0V
Provide a 24-V DC power supply. (Rated power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC)
Operation
start input
Bank
switching
input
START
Cam output will start if the START signal is shorted with 0V.
0.5 mm2
BANK1
The BANK signals are used to select the execution bank for the
Cam Positioner.
0.5 mm2
BANK2
BANK3
Origin shift
input
TRIG
The BANK signals turn ON when shorted with 0V.
Bank No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
BANK1
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
BANK2
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
BANK3
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
8
ON
ON
ON
0.5 mm2
Origin shift is performed when this signal is shorted with 0V.
Note 1. The TRIG signal is disabled when the Resolver rotates at
4 r/min or greater.
Note
2. The TRIG signal is enabled when it is ON for 10 ms or
more.
Inside
Reset input
7
OFF
ON
ON
New origin value
Y
Origin shift execution
RESET If this signal is shorted with 0V, a hardware reset will be
performed and the Unit will return to the state it was in upon
power ON. Regardless of output-hold settings, all outputs will be
turned OFF. Also, the origin value for the origin shift will be lost.
0.5 mm2
Note 1. Use M3.5 round or forked crimp terminals for functional ground and protective ground terminals.
• Round crimp terminal
6.2 mm
max.
• Forked crimp terminal
6.2 mm
max.
Note 2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used as
I/O power supplies in order to comply EC Directives.
2-18
Design
Chapter 2
D Control Input Specifications
Item
Rated input voltage
Input impedance
Input current
ON voltage
OFF voltage
ON/OFF response time
Internal circuit
Specification
24 V DC --15%/10%
4.7 kΩ
4.7 mA TYP. (for 24 V DC input)
17 V min. between 24-V terminal and control input terminals.
5 V max. between 24-V terminal and control input terminals.
1.0 ms
START
BANK1 to 3
TRIG
RESET
4.7 kΩ
H Control Output Wiring
D Wiring Method
L
L
Terminal screw size: M3
MSDET
COM
/0 V
24 V DC
for load
Tightening torque: 0.5 N S m
L
D Terminal Functions
Terminal name
Control output common
terminal
Symbol
Function
COM/0 V The COM/0 V terminal is the common
terminal for control output.
RUN output
RUN
Resolver movement
detection output
Error output
MSDET
ERROR
It is connected to the 0V terminal on the
control I/O output power supply.
The RUN terminal indicates the operation
status of the Unit.
It turns ON when cam output is enabled.
The M⋅DET terminal turns ON when the
Resolver is rotating at 4 r/min or faster.
The ERROR terminal turns OFF when an
error is generated.
Recommended
connection wire
diameter
0.5 mm2
0.5 mm2
0.5 mm2
0.5 mm2
2-19
Design
Chapter 2
Note 1. Use M3.5 round or forked crimp terminals for functional ground and protective ground terminals.
• Round crimp terminal
6.2 mm
max.
• Forked crimp terminal
6.2 mm
max.
Note 2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used as
I/O power supplies in order to comply EC Directives.
Note 3. The control I/O power supply must be turned ON to operate the control output circuit.
D Control Output Specifications
Item
Maximum switching capacity
Leakage current
Residual voltage
ON response time
OFF response time
Internal circuit
Specification
24 V DC --15%/10%, 0.3 A/point
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
RUN
M-DET
ERROR
2-20
Design
Chapter 2
2-3-4 Resolver Wiring
Use OMRON Resolver Cables which are designed to reduce noise.
Resolver Cables transfer signals that require a high degree of accuracy. Separate the
Resolver Cables from other cables as much as possible to prevent the accuracy being
affected by induction noise resulting from low signal voltage.
S Separate Resolver Cables as much as possible from control and drive wiring inside
the control panel.
S For external wiring, house the cables in a low-current duct and shield with grounded
conduction plates.
The Cam Positioner and Resolver can be separated by a maximum distance of 100 m.
H Resolver Wiring Method
3 m plug-in cable
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjC Extension Cable
3F88L-RS17/-RS17T Resolver
Connector type
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjNA Cable
3F88L-RS15 Resolver
35-cm Separate wire
plug-in cable
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
3F88L-CRjjjSA Cable
3F88L-RS15W Resolver
2-21
Design
Chapter 2
D Resolver Cable Models
Resolver Extension Cables (for 3F88L-RS17/-RS17T)
2m
5m
10 m
20 m
50 m
3F88L-CR002C
3F88L-CR005C
3F88L-CR010C
3F88L-CR020C
3F88L-CR050C
Note 1. A maximum of two extension cables can be joined together.
Note 2. Refer to 6-2 Resolver Specifications for information on cable wire colors and pin positions.
Resolver Cables (for 3F88L-RS15)
3m
5m
10 m
15 m
20 m
3F88L-CR003NA
3F88L-CR005NA
3F88L-CR010NA
3F88L-CR015NA
3F88L-CR020NA
Resolver Cables (for 3F88L-RS15W)
3m
5m
10 m
3F88L-CR003SA
3F88L-CR005SA
3F88L-CR010SA
2-3-5 Cam Output Wiring
Cam output is an open-collector output. The wiring connectors are located on top of the
Cam Positioner Unit and the wiring is easily performed if Cam Output Cables are used.
H Cam Output Wiring Method
Use the 3F88L-CGjjjS Cam Output Cable for direct connection to PCs or Relays and the
3F88L-CGjjjN Cam Output Cable for direct connection to an I/O Block.
Note Cam output is also used for connection to Display Units. Refer to 2-3-6 Connecting a Display Unit
for details.
Cam Output Connectors
CAM17 to 32
CAM1 to 16
G7TC-OC16
I/O Block
3F88L-CGjjjN
Cam Output Cable
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
2-22
PC or Relay
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
Design
Chapter 2
Note The 3F88L-160 16-output Cam Positioner does not have cam output connector terminal numbers
CAM17 to CAM32.
D Cam Output Cable Models
Cam Output Cables for Connection to I/O Blocks
0.5 m
1m
3F88L-CG0R5N
3F88L-CG001N
Cam Output Cables for Connection to Other Devices
1m
3m
3F88L-CG001S
3F88L-CG003S
H Cam Outputs for I/O Blocks
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
G7TC-OC16 I/O Block
3F88LCGjjjN
-+
-+
+
--
2-23
Design
Chapter 2
H Cam Output Cable Connection Pin Positions and 3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable Colors
Pin Layout
Cam
Positioner
External
Cam output
COM/0V
Pin No.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Signal name
NC
COM/0V
CAM16 (CAM32)
CAM15 (CAM31)
CAM14 (CAM30)
CAM13 (CAM29)
CAM12 (CAM28)
CAM11 (CAM27)
CAM10 (CAM26)
CAM9 (CAM25)
Cable color
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Gray
White
Black
Pin No.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
Signal name
NC
COM/0V
CAM8 (CAM24)
CAM7 (CAM23)
CAM6 (CAM22)
CAM5 (CAM21)
CAM4 (CAM20)
CAM3 (CAM19)
CAM2 (CAM18)
CAM1 (CAM17)
Cable color
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Gray
White
Black
Note 1. Pin numbers have been given for convenience. The pin “A1”, indicated by the Y mark on the
protruding side, should be used as the starting pin number.
Note 2. The signal names in parentheses in the table will be applicable if the Cam Connector Cable is
connected to the connectors for cam outputs 17 to 32 (CAM17 to CAM32). These connectors
are not available on the 3F88L-160 16-point Cam Positioner.
Note 3. The maximum switching capacity for cam outputs is 26.4 V DC, 300 mA. However, keep this
at no more than 1.6 A per connector.
Note 4. The COM/0V connector is common to both A2 and B2 pins.
Note 5. If the present value output function is used, some cam outputs cannot be used.
Note 6. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used as
I/O power supplies in order to comply EC Directives.
2-24
Design
Chapter 2
H Cam Output Specifications
Item
Maximum switching capacity
Leakage current
Residual voltage
ON response time
Off response time
Internal circuit
Specifications
24 V DC --15%/10%, 0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/connector
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.05 ms max.
0.07 ms max.
CAM1 to 32
2-3-6 Connecting a Display Unit
If the Cam Positioner is connected to a Display Unit, the present angle and Resolver
speed can be displayed.
The Display Unit is connected to the cam output connectors on the Unit via Cam Output
Cables.
Note 1. The speed display can have an error margin or 5 r/min max.
Note 2. Parameters must be set to display present values such as the present angle
and Resolver speed. The present value output and cam output share terminals. Some cam output signals can no longer be used, therefore, when present values are being output.
H Connecting a M7E Display Unit
Use a 3F88L-CGjjjS Cam Output Cable to connect the M7E Display Unit.
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
3F88L-CGjjjS Cam Output Cable
M7E Display Unit
D Functions
The present angle (in degrees) or the Resolver speed (r/min) can be displayed on a 3- or 4-digit Display
Unit. The display data is set using the present value display function parameters.
2-25
Design
Chapter 2
If set to an automatically switching display, the present angle will be displayed when the Resolver speed
is less than 4 r/min and the Resolver speed will be displayed when it is greater than 4 r/min.
D Unit Models Used
Name
Display
p y Unit
(N
(Numerals)
l )
Display
p y Unit (Units)
(
)
End Plate
Display Unit
Connector
Cam Output
p
C bl
Cable
1m
3m
Model
M7E-01DRD2 (red, decimal, one digit)
M7E-01DGD2 (green, decimal, one
digit)
M7E-01UR2-V (red, rpm)
M7E-01UG2-V (green, rpm)
M7E-01UR2-A (red, no display)
M7E-01UG2-A (green, no display)
M7E-2M (light-blue case)
M7E-2M-1 (black case)
NRT-C (soldered-terminal type)
Remarks
Combine as manyy Display
p y Units
(N
(Numerals)
l ) as required
i d to achieve
hi
the
h
required number of display digits.
If the automatically
y switching
g display
p y
f
function
i is
i to be
b used,
d two Display
Di l Units
U i
(Units) are required -- an “r/min” Unit and
a “degrees”
degrees Unit.
One set is required.
q
Enough connectors for the number of
Display Units is required.
One Cam Output
p Cable is required.
q
3F88L-CG001S
3F88L-CG003S
D Display Contents and Required Number of Units
Display
Present
angle
l
r/min
/
Switching
present
angle/r/min
display
p y
Resolution
setting
360
720
360
720
360
720
Parameter
Display
for present
range
value output
function
1
0 to 359
1
0 to 719
2
0 to 999
0 to 1,600
2
0 to 800
3
0 to 359
(degrees)/
4 to 999
(r/min)
4
0 to 359
(degrees)/
4 to 1,600
(r/min)
3
0 to 719
(degrees)/
4 to 800
(r/min)
Required number of Units
Numeric
Display Unit
Units
Display Unit
Display Unit
Connectors
3
3
3
4
3
3
----------1 no display
Unit and 1
“rpm” Unit
3
3
3
4
3
5
4
1 no display
Unit and 1
“rpm” Unit
6
3
1 no display
Unit and 1
“rpm” Unit
5
Note 1. Refer to 3-5-2 Initial Settings for information on setting the display resolution.
Note 2. Refer to 3-6-10 Present Value Output Function for information on parameters for this function.
Note 3. One 3F88L-CGjjjS Cam Output Cable and one End Plate set are required when connecting Units other than those listed in the above table.
Note 4. When the resolution is set at 720, the present angle display will read “1” for every 0.5°.
2-26
Design
Chapter 2
D Wiring Example
The following wiring example is for automatically switching the 4-digit display between the present
angle and the Resolver speed (with units also displayed).
M7E Display Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Cam Output Connectors
Signal name
Pin No.
CAM13 (CAM29)
CAM14 (CAM30)
Display data
CAM15 (CAM31)
CAM16 (CAM32)
1-digit LE signal CAM12 (CAM28)
2-digit LE signal CAM11 (CAM27)
3-digit LE signal CAM10 (CAM26)
4-digit LE signal CAM9 (CAM25)
CAM8 (CAM24)
“Degrees”
CAM7 (CAM23)
“r/min”
COM/0V
Common cam
output terminal
Blue
Green
Yellow
Orange
Purple
Gray
White
Black
Orange
Yellow
Red
(see
note 1)
4th digit
(1,000’s
digit)
M7E01jjj2
3rd digit
(100’s
digit)
M7E01jjj2
2nd digit
(10’s digit)
M7E01jjj2
1st digit
(1’s digit)
M7E01jjj2
No display
M7E01Uj2-A
r/min
M7E01Uj2-V
Note 1. If pin 9 (4th digit) is left open, a zero (0) will appear as “0.” In the above wiring example, an
output of 0 would appear as “0000.”
Note 2. The cam output signal names not in parentheses will be displayed for 3F88L-160 Cam Positioners and the names in parentheses will be displayed for 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners.
Note 3. The circled numbers in the diagram are the terminal numbers for the NRT connectors.
Note 4. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supply used as an
I/O power supply in order to comply to EC Directives.
2-27
Design
Chapter 2
Note 5. Some display examples are given below.
• Present angle display
• Resolver speed display
(see
note)
(blank)
(blank)
rpm
Note Write “deg” in the space when using a no display Unit.
H Connecting a M7F Display Unit
Use a 3F88L-CGjjjS Cam Output Cable to connect the M7F Display Unit.
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-CGjjjS
Cam Output Cable
M7F Display Unit
D Functions
The present angle (in degrees) or the Resolver speed (r/min) can be displayed on a 4-digit numeric
Display Unit. The display data is set using the present value display function parameters.
Note The M7F Display Unit does not have a function to change the unit of display. Do not use this Unit in
automatically switching display mode.
D Unit Models Used
Name
4-digit
g Display
p y Unit,, character height
g
14 mm
4 digits
g + Display
p y Unit (Units),
(
),
character
h
height
h i h 14 mm
Units Nameplate,
p
, character height
g
14 mm
4-digit
g Display
p y Unit,, character height
g
25 mm
4 digits
g + Display
p y Unit (Units),
(
),
character
h
height
h i h 25 mm
Unit nameplate,
p
, character height
g
25 mm
Display Unit Connector
Display
p y Unit Connector Cover
Cam Output
p Cable
2-28
1m
3m
Model
M7F-4D1R (red)
M7F-4D1G (green)
M7F-4D1RT (red)
M7F-4D1GT (green)
M7F-1 (no display)
M7F-RPM-1 (r/min)
M7F-4D2R (red)
M7F-4D2G (green)
M7F-4D2RT (red)
M7F-4D2GT (green)
M7F-2 (no display)
M7F-RPM-2 (r/min)
XG5M-2035-N (separately wired
pressure-welded type)
XG5S-1001
XG5S-2012
3F88L-CG001S
3F88L-CG003S
Remarks
Select the appropriate
pp p
Unit
b
based
d on the
h display
di l character
h
height requirements for units
height,
display, and color of displayed
characters.
When using a Unit with units
display,
p y select a Unit Nameplate
p
with
ith with
ith same height
h i ht character
h
t
display There is no Unit
display.
Nameplate for “degrees.”
degrees. Select
the “no display”
p y Unit Nameplate
p
instead.
One Display Unit Connector is
required.
Two XG5S-1001 Covers or one
XG S
XG5S-2012
C
Cover is
i required.
i d
One Cable is required.
q
Design
Chapter 2
D Wiring Example
The following wiring example is for four-digit display of the Resolver speed.
M7F Display Unit
Cam Output Connectors
Signal name
CAM13 (CAM29)
CAM14 (CAM30)
Display data
CAM15 (CAM31)
CAM16 (CAM32)
Common cam
output terminal
COM/0V
Pin No.
A8
A5
A4
A3
A2
1-digit LE signal
CAM12 (CAM28)
2-digit LE signal CAM16 (CAM32)
A7
A8
CAM16 (CAM32)
4-digit LE signal CAM16 (CAM32)
A9
A10
3-digit LE signal
Blue
Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
V
Purple
Gray
White
Black
Power
supply
12 to 24 V DC
input
Power
⊖ supply
output
Case mark
Note 1. The cam output signal names not in parentheses will be displayed for 3F88L-160 Cam Positioners and the names in parentheses will be displayed for 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners.
Note 2. The circled terminal numbers have been provided for convenience. When assembling the
socket, pay attention to the direction of the polarity guide and connect the wires as shown in
the above terminal layout.
Note 3. The case mark (Y) indicates the first digit of the M7F terminal number and is different from the
connector Y mark described previously.
Note 4. A display example is shown below.
• Resolver speed display
rpm
Unit Nameplate
2-29
3
Chapter 3
Operation
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Nomenclature of Display and Operation
Sections
Modes, Functions, and Display
Operation Procedure
Selecting Function Levels
Basic Operation
Applied Functions
Operation
3-1
Chapter 3
Nomenclature of Display and Operation Sections
Bank/Function display
Cam/Parameter No. display
Mode selection switch
P⋅CLR switch
ADJ switch
CW/CCW setting switch
Operation keys
Present angle/OFF angle
display
No. of revolutions/ON angle
display
H Operation Keys
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
ON/
OFF
Bank/Function Key
Down Key
Cam/Parameter Key
Forward Key
ON/OFF Switching Key
Up Key
3-2
CLR
SET
Clear Key
Set Key
Operation
Chapter 3
H Display Patterns for Seven-segment Display
Marks underneath a character display indicate that the character is flashing.
3-3
Operation
3-2
Chapter 3
Modes, Functions, and Display
H Modes
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner has three modes: SET, PRGM, and RUN.
Set Mode (SET)
S Unit parameter settings
S Various compensation
value settings
Program Mode (PRGM)
Mode
change
S Creation, editing, and
deletion of cam programs.
S Trial operation
Operation Mode (RUN)
S Normal operation
Mode
change
S Adjustment operation
S Teaching
S Cam output and control
I/O monitoring
S Communications settings
S Origin shift
S Origin compensation
H Changing Modes
The mode selection switch is used to change modes.
Mode selection switch
H Functions by Mode
Classification
Function
selection
Initial
settings
3-4
Function name
Applicable modes
Front panel
displays
Conditions
Reference secsec
tion
Function level selection
SET
---
Function ParameNo.
ter No.
U
1
Resolution selection
SET
---
A
1
3-5-2
Rotation direction
selection
SET, PRGM, RUN
Note The CW/
CCW setting
switch is
used.
---
---
---
3-5-2
3-5-1
Operation
Classification
Basic
functions
Chapter 3
Function name
Applicable modes
Conditions
Front panel
displays
Function ParameNo.
ter No.
1 to 8
1 to 32
(1 to 4)
(1 to 16)
(see note (see note
2)
1)
0 to 8
--(0 to 4)
(see note
2)
-----
Reference section
Cam program writing
PRGM
---
Program number
checking
SET
---
Origin compensation
Press the ADJ switch
in SET mode.
The Resolver speed
must be less than 4
r/min.
Cam output (from cam
output connector)
RUN (only when
START signal is ON)
Output during normal
operation
(Depending on the
output holding
function when error
is generated and the
type of error, cam
outputs may be held
or turned OFF.)
---
---
---
3-5-6
---
---
3-5-8
PRGM (Only during
trial operation)
Con- Introl put
I/O
signals
START
(Start
operation)
RUN
Note
BANK1 to
3 (Change
banks)
RUN
---
---
---
TRIG
(Origin
shift)
RUN
---
---
---
SET, PRGM, RUN
---
---
---
RUN (Only when
START signal is ON)
ON during normal
operation (cam
output enabled).
---
---
ON when Resolver
speed is 4 r/min or
greater.
---
---
OFF when an error
has been generated.
---
---
---
o
1, 2
RESET
(Reset)
Out- RUN (Cam
put output
sig- enabled)
nals
M-DET
(Resolver
rotation
detection)
ERROR
(Error)
I/O monitor
3-5-3
3-5-3
3-5-5
This signal is
disabled and
cam output is
executed
when in
PRGM mode
and a trial operation.
PRGM (Only during
trial operation)
RUN
PRGM (Only during
trial operation)
SET, PRGM, RUN
RUN (Possible when
START signal is ON
or OFF.)
3-5-7
3-5
Operation
Classification
Applied
functions
Chapter 3
Function name
Applicable modes
Conditions
Origin compensation
value setting
Note Origin compensation can
also be performed as a basic function at
function level 0
or 1
SET
---
Origin shift (operation)
Note Used for both
origin compensation operation and
compensation
value.
TRIG input in RUN
Resolver speed must
mode (possible when be less than 4 r/min.
Backlash compensation
value setting
Enable/disable
backlash compensation
setting
SET
Backlash compensation
Front panel
displays
Function ParameNo.
ter No.
b
1
---
---
---
b
2
SET
---
H
1
RUN
Only when backlash
compensation value
is enabled.
---
---
Reference section
3-6-4
START signal is ON
or OFF.)
PRGM (trial
operation only)
3-6-5
SET (only when
teaching)
Advance angle
compensation setting
Advance angle
compensation
enable/disable setting
SET
---
b
3, 4, 5
SET
---
H
2
Advance angle
compensation
RUN
---
---
---
3-6-6
PRGM (trial
operation only)
SET (only when
teaching)
3-6
Cam protect setting
SET
---
C
---
Cam protect function
(operation)
PRGM
---
---
One-direction function
setting
One-direction function
(operation)
SET
The power must be
reset to ON after
cam protect has
been set.
---
F
---
RUN (except during
compensation
operation)
---
---
---
Output hold setting
SET
---
H
3
3-6-7
3-6-8
3-6-9
Operation
Classification
Applied
functions
Chapter 3
Function name
Applicable modes
Conditions
Output hold function
(operation)
When switching from
RUN mode to PRGM
or SET mode (when
the START signal is
ON).
Present value output
setting
Present value output
function (operation)
SET
The power must be
reset to ON after
output hold has been
set.
The START signal
must be ON (cam
outputs will be OFF if
the START signal is
OFF).
The RESET signal
must be OFF (cam
outputs will be OFF if
the RESET signal is
ON).
---
SET, PRGM, RUN
Cam program
creating/
g/
changing
h
i
Pulse
output
setting
Cam outputs/cam
program
changing
g g
Communications
Front panel
displays
Function ParameNo.
ter No.
-----
Reference section
3-6-9
H
4
3-6-10
The power must be
reset to ON after
present value output
has been set.
Shared with a cam
output.
---
---
SET
---
P
---
3-6-11
Teaching
SET
d
---
3-6-12
Trial
operation
PRGM
Resolver speed must
be less than 4 r/min.
---
1 to 32
(1 to 16)
(see note
1)
1 to 32
(1 to 16)
(see note
1)
---
3-6-14
Adjustment RUN
operation
---
CompoWay/F
communications
function
SET, PRGM, RUN
(the content of the
communications will
differ for each mode.)
---
1 to 8
(1 to 4)
(see note
2)
1 to 8
(1 to 4)
(see note
2)
---
Copy
SET
---
t
---
3-6-13
Baud rate
setting
(shared
with CompoWay/F
and copy
operation.)
SET
---
b
6
4-1
3-6-13
Note
1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note
2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses.
3-6-14
Chapter 4
3-7
Operation
Chapter 3
H Displays by Mode
D SET Mode
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
1 to 8
0
Origin
(1 to 4)
compensation
((see note 2))
absolute angle
1 to 32
Program
(1 to 16)
number
(see note 1)
checking
A (a)
b (b)
1
Resolution
selection
Data range
-----
0, 1
1
Origin
compensation
value
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
2
Backlash
compensation
value
0 to 179
(0 to 359)
(see note 2)
3
Advance angle
compensation
value 1
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
4
Advance angle
compensation
value 2
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
SPEED/ON
Displays the
absolute angle for
origin compensation.
Displays the number
of steps for the
displayed bank or
cam number.
0: 360 divisions/
revolution (factory
setting)
1: 720 divisions/
revolution
Sets origin
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets backlash
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
2.
Factory setting “0.”
---
5
Advance angle
compensation
value 3
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
---
6
Baud rate
1, 2
1: 9,600 bps (factory
setting)
2: 19,200 bps
3-8
POSITION/OFF
-----
---
---
---
---
Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
Sets angle data for
advance angle value
2.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
3 (advance angle
compensated
position).
Factory setting “0.”
---
Operation
Chapter 3
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
--Cam protect
c (c)
Data range
---
d (d)
---
Teaching
---
F (f)
---
One-direction
function setting
0 to 2
SPEED/ON
POSITION/OFF
Protection can be set
or released for each
cam number or for
all cams in a bank
number.
(Factory setting:
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as ON angle data.
---
Protect can be set or
released for each
cam number or for
all cams in a bank
number (Factory
setting
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as OFF angle data.
0: One-direction
function disabled
(factory setting)
1: Enabled in
forward direction
H (h)
1
2
3
Backlash
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Advance angle
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Output hold
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0: Backlash
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Backlash
compensation
enabled
0: Advance angle
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Advance angle
compensation
enabled
0: Output hold
disabled (factory
setting)
2: Enabled in
reverse direction
---
---
---
1: Output hold
enabled
3-9
Operation
Chapter 3
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
4
Present value
H (h)
output setting
Data range
0 to 4
SPEED/ON
0: No present value
output function
(factory setting)
POSITION/OFF
---
1: 4-digit present
angle (no units)
2: 4-digit number of
rotations (no
units)
3: Automatic
switching of 3-digit
present angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
P (p)
(see note 4)
---
Pulse output
setting
---
t (t)
(see note 4)
0
Data transfer
(Slave setting)
---
1
Data transfer
0 to 3
(Master setting)
4: Automatic
switching of 4-digit
present angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
Writes pulse output
program to any bank
or cam number (sets
pulse number).
(Operates on a
command issued
from Master Unit.)
0: Disabled (factory
setting)
(Sets pulse start
position.)
-----
1: Read data
2: Write data
U (u)
1
Function level
selection
0 to 2
3: Verify data
0: Function level 0
(monitor only)
---
1: Function level 1
(basic
operation/monitor
only) (factory
setting)
---
---
Error display
---
2: Function level 2
(all functions)
E--** (error display)
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
Note 3. Functions A, b, C, F, H, and U will be enabled after the power has been turned OFF and then
ON again.
Note 4. Functions P and t are special operations that are not stored as parameters.
3-10
Operation
Chapter 3
D RUN Mode
Bank/Function
1 to 8
( to 4)) (see
(1
(
note 2))
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
o (o)
( )
---
Cam/Parameter
Start input
OFF
ON
ON
--ru (rU)
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
1
--2
-------
SPEED/ON
Number of Resolver
rotations
i
(r/min)
(/ i )
POSITION/OFF
Present angle
g
Compensation operation ON angle
Cam output monitor
Control I/O monitor
E--** (error display)
Compensation operation OFF angle
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
D PRGM Mode
Bank/Function
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
---
Cam/Parameter
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
---
SPEED/ON
ON angle
POSITION/OFF
OFF angle
“t (t)” + ON angle (trial
operation)
E--** (error display)
OFF angle (trial
operation)
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
3-11
Operation
3-3
Chapter 3
Operation Procedure
3-3-1 Before Operation
H Basic Use
• The procedure for using the Cam Positioner at function level 1 (basic operation/monitor only) is outlined below.
Procedure
Installation
Wiring
Power ON
Contents
Install the Cam Positioner according to the installation
environment conditions.
Connect the wiring for the power supply, Resolver, and
peripheral devices.
Before the power is turned ON:
Reference
section
2-2
2-3
• Check that the wires and connectors for the Resolver and
peripheral devices have been connected properly.
• Check that the Resolver and the machinery are not connected.
After the power is turned ON:
• Check that there are no error codes displayed (E--**).
Function level selection
Initial settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Creation and confirmation
of cam programs
Connection between
Resolver and machinery
Execution of origin
compensation
Operation/monitoring
Function level selection
• Set the mode selection switch to RUN and check that the
number of revolutions and the present angle display changes
when the Resolver axis is rotated by hand.
Select function level 1 (basic operation/monitor only).
3-5-1
3-5-2
Set the resolution (SET mode) and rotation direction
(CW/CCW) to suit the application.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
Create and check cam programs (PRGM mode).
Check the number of programs (SET mode).
Turn OFF the power and connect the Resolver and the
machinery.
Turn ON the power and execute origin compensation (use
the ADJ switch in SET mode).
Change to RUN mode and check the operation of the
machinery and monitor the I/O status. Correct the cam
program if required (PRGM mode).
If required, set to function level 0 (monitor only) to prevent
faulty operation.
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-4
Note This procedure is applicable when only the basic functions (function level 1) are used. In the
cases outlined below, the applied functions (function level 2) must be used. (Refer to 3-6 Applied
Functions.)
S When setting origin compensation values, using backlash compensation, advance angle compensation, and other compensation functions.
S When executing a trial or adjustment operation.
3-12
Operation
Chapter 3
S When using the teaching function.
S When setting pulse output, cam protect, output hold, one-direction function, and present value
output.
H Applied
• The procedure for using the Cam Positioner at function level 2 (all functions) is outlined below.
Procedure
Installation
Wiring
Power ON
Contents
Install the Cam Positioner according to the installation
environment conditions.
Connect the wiring for the power supply, Resolver, and
peripheral devices.
Before the power is turned ON:
Reference
section
2-2
2-3
• Check that the wires and connectors for the Resolver and
peripheral devices have been connected properly.
• Check that the Resolver and the machinery are not connected.
After the power is turned ON:
• Check that there are no error codes displayed (E--**).
Function level selection
Initial settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Parameter settings
Power resetting (OFF to
ON)
Creation and confirmation
of cam programs
Connection between
Resolver and machinery
Execution of origin
compensation
Teaching
Trial operation
Operation/monitoring
Origin shift execution
Compensation operation
Function level selection
• Set the mode selection switch to RUN and check that the
number of revolutions and the present angle display changes
when the Resolver axis is rotated by hand.
Select function level 2 (all functions).
3-6-1
3-5-2
Set the resolution (SET mode) and rotation direction
(CW/CCW) to suit the application.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
Make the parameter settings.
Turn ON the power to enable the set parameters.
3-6-2 and 3-6-3
Create and check cam programs (PRGM mode).
Check the number of programs (SET mode).
Turn OFF the power and connect the Resolver and the
machinery.
Turn ON the power and execute origin compensation (use
the ADJ switch in SET mode).
If required, use the teaching function (SET mode) and create
a cam program while operating the machinery manually.
Change to PRGM mode, and, if required, adjust the cam
program while checking the timing of the cam output.
Change to RUN mode and check the operation of the
machinery and monitor the I/O status. Correct the cam
program if required (PRGM mode).
If required, turn ON TRIG input and execute origin shift
(RUN mode).
If required, adjust the cam program while checking the timing
of the cam output.
If required, set to function level 0 (monitor only) to prevent
faulty operation.
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-6-12
3-6-14
3-5-6
3-6-4
3-6-14
3-4
3-13
Operation
3-4
Chapter 3
Selecting Function Levels
Three function levels are available to limit 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner functions by
setting the function level selection (Function No. U).
Limiting the Cam Positioner functions protects it from being incorrectly set or operated
by the user.
S Function Level 0 (Monitor Only)
Cam output and monitoring are enabled.
Cam program writing and parameter setting cannot be made.
Function level 0 is designed to prevent inadvertent changes to the cam program or
parameters.
Functions for which the settings have already been completed are enabled and may
be used at this level.
S Function Level 1 (Basic Operation/Monitor Only) (Factory Setting)
In addition to the functions available at function level 0, cam programs may be
edited.
This function level is used for basic operation.
S Function Level 2 (All Functions)
All Cam Positioner functions are enabled.
This function level is for using applied functions.
It is recommended, therefore, that cam programs be created and parameters set at level
2 (or level 1) first and then the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner be used at level 0 (or level
1).
H Limiting Functions by Function Level
The following table shows how functions are limited by the function level settings. The “Yes” indicates
that that function is enabled and “No” indicates that the function is disabled.
Classification
i
Initial
settings
Function
Resolution selection (setting) Set the resolution for
one Resolver rotation.
rotation
Resolution selection
(360 or 720
(operation)
divisions/rotation)
Rotation direction selection
(setting)
Rotation direction selection
(operation)
3-14
Contents
Select either CW or
CCW direction.
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reference
3-5-2
3-5-2
Operation
Classification
Basic
functions
Chapter 3
Function
Cam program writing
Program number checking
Origin compensation
Cam output (from cam
output connector)
Contents
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
No
Yes
Yes
Writes and edits cam
programs (settings for
cam output ON/OFF
angles)
Checks the number of Yes
cam program steps.
When the ADJ switch Yes
is pressed in SET
mode, the present
Resolver angle at that
time is changed to 0
or to the origin
compensation value.
While the START
Yes
signal is ON in RUN
mode, the cam
outputs for the
specified bank
number are turned
ON or OFF according
to the cam program
and present Resolver
angle.
Reference
3-5-3
Yes
Yes
3-5-3
Yes
Yes
3-5-5
Yes
Yes
3-5-6
3-15
Operation
Function
Classification
Basic
functions
Chapter 3
Control
I/O
Input
signals
START
(Start
operation)
BANK1 to 3
(Change
banks)
TRIG
(Origin shift)
RESET
(Reset)
Output
sigg
nals
RUN (Cam
output
enabled)
M⋅DET
(Resolver
rotation
detection)
ERROR
(Error)
I/O monitor
3-16
Contents
While the START
signal is ON in RUN
mode, the cam
outputs for the
specified bank
number are turned
ON or OFF according
to the cam program
and present Resolver
angle.
Specifies the bank
number to be
executed.
When the TRIG signal
is turned ON, origin
shift is executed.
When the RESET
signal is turned ON,
hardware reset is
executed.
Turns ON when cam
output is enabled.
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Turns ON when
Yes
Resolver speed is
4 r/min or greater.
(Origin compensation,
origin shift, and
teaching operations
cannot be performed
while M⋅DET is turned
ON.)
Turns OFF when an
Yes
error is generated.
Monitors Resolver
Yes
speed, present angle,
cam output status,
and control I/O signal
status.
Note Effective for
troubleshooting
at startup.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reference
3-5-8
3-5-7
Operation
Classification
Applied
functions
Chapter 3
Function
Origin compensation value
setting
Origin shift (operation)
Backlash compensation
value setting
Enable/disable backlash
compensation setting
Backlash compensation
Contents
Sets the
compensation value
to match the
mechanical origin to
the Cam Positioner
origin.
Note The compensation value is
shared by the
origin shift operation and the
origin compensation operation.
Note The origin compensation operation is possible even with
the basic functions (function
levels 0 and 1).
When the TRIG input
is turned ON in RUN
mode, the present
Resolver angle at that
time is changed to 0
or to the origin
compensation value.
Sets a value
equivalent to the
mechanical
looseness.
Enables/disables the
backlash
compensation value.
When the backlash
compensation value is
enabled, provides
cam outputs in
conformance with the
mechanical
looseness.
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reference
3-6-4
3-6-5
3-17
Operation
Classification
Applied
functions
Chapter 3
Function
Advance angle
compensation setting
Advance angle
compensation
enable/disable setting
Advance angle
compensation
Cam protect setting
Cam protect function
(operation)
One-direction function
setting
One-direction function
(operation)
Output hold setting
Output hold function
(operation)
Present value output setting
Present value output
function (operation)
3-18
Contents
Sets a compensation
value to advance all
cam output ON and
OFF angles in
proportion to the
number of Resolver
rotations.
Enables/disables the
advance angle
compensation value.
When the advance
angle compensation
value is enabled,
advances the ON and
OFF angles in
proportion to the
number of Resolver
rotations.
Protects ON/OFF
angle settings (cam
programs) for each
bank and cam.
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enables cam outputs
when the Resolver is
rotating in one
direction only, either
forward or reverse.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
When switching from
RUN to PRGM or SET
modes or when an
error is generated,
holds the cam output
status.
Using cam output
signals, outputs signal
connecting to M7E,
M7F or other Display
Units
Units.
Note Uses CAM 9(7)
to 16 for
3F88L-160 and
CAM 25 (23) to
32 3F88L-162.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reference
3-6-6
3-6-7
3-6-8
3-6-9
3-6-10
Operation
Classification
Applied
functions
Chapter 3
Function
Cam program creating/changing
Cam
outputs/cam
program
changing
Communications
Pulse output
setting
Contents
Creates cam
programs that turn ON
and OFF at constant
intervals in any bank
or cam number.
Teaching
Inputs data from the
Resolver as ON/OFF
angle settings.
Trial
When the system
operation
starts up, checks the
cam output status in
PRGM mode and
changes (adjusts) the
ON/OFF angle one
setting at a time.
Adjustment
After the system has
operation
started operating,
checks the cam
output status in
PRGM mode and
changes (adjusts) the
ON/OFF angles one
setting at a time.
CompoWay/F Acts as the Slave Unit
communicafor CompoWay/F
tions function communications and
reads/writes Cam
Positioner programs
and parameters from
the host CPU and
monitors present
angle and number of
rotations.
Copy
Transfers data (cam
programs,
parameters) between
Cam Positioners.
Sets a common baud
Baud rate
rate for the
setting
CompoWay/F and
Baud rate
copy functions.
setting
operation
Function level
0
1
2
(Moni(Basic
(All
tor
operafunconly)
tion/
tions)
monitor
only)
No
No
Yes
Reference
3-6-11
No
No
Yes
3-6-12
No
No
Yes
3-6-14
No
No
Yes
3-6-14
Yes
Yes
Yes
Section 4
No
Yes
Yes
3-6-13
No
No
Yes
3-6-13
Yes
Yes
Yes
4-1
3-6-13
3-19
Operation
3-5
Chapter 3
Basic Operation
3-5-1 Function Level Selection Setting (SET Mode)
H Function Level Selection Setting and Checking
Check if the function level is set to function level 1 (basic operation/monitor only). Change to function
level 1 (basic operation/monitor only) if set to a different level.
Function level
Function
No.
U (u)
Parameter
No.
1
Function
Function
level
selection
Setting
range
0 to 2
0
1
2
Details
0: Function level 0 (monitor only)
1: Function level 1 (basic operation/monitor
only) (factory setting)
2: Function level 2 (all functions)
D Procedure
Set the function level selection to “1” (function level 1).
Operation
Display
Explanation
If the Cam Positioner power is turned ON while in RUN
mode, the display will appear as shown to the left.
• Bank/Function: Displays the bank number specified
by the bank selection input (banks 1 to 3).
• Cam/Parameter: (Clear)
• SPEED/ON angle display: Displays the Resolver
speed (r/min).
• POSITION/OFF: Displays the present angle.
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET
mode.
BANK/
FUN
SET
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until “U” appears
on the display.
Note The display will change from
1→2→....→8→A→t→U→1→..
Press the Set Key to allow settings to be made.
• Cam/Parameter number display: “1”
• SPEED/ON angle display: Flashes current setting
If the setting is not on “1,” use the Up or Down Key to
change to “1” (function level 1).
0: Function level 0
1: Function level 1
2: Function level 2
3-20
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display
SET
BANK/
FUN
Explanation
Press the Set Key to confirm the settings.
The setting will stop flashing for approximately
1 second and then resume flashing.
Note When a setting is flashing, the Up and Down
Keys are enabled and the setting may be
changed.
Press the Bank/Function Key.
The display will return to only the function number that
appears.
Turn OFF the power supply. (The settings will now be
enabled.)
Note 1. The functions are enabled once the power has been turned OFF and then ON again.
Note 2. The display will change as shown below when the Bank/Function Key is pressed repeatedly
to set the function number.
Function level 0: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→U→1→etc.
Function level 1: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→A→t→U→1→etc.
Function level 2: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→A→b→C→d→F→H→P→t→U→1→etc.
If the resolution selection (explained in the next section) is set to “1” (720 divisions/rotation),
“5→6→7→8” will not be displayed.
3-5-2 Initial Settings
Only the rotation direction (CW/CCW selection switch) and resolution setting (SET
mode) are changed at function level 1.
H Rotation Direction Selection Setting
The CW/CCW setting switch is used to change the direction of rotation.
CW/CCW setting switch
Set the direction of increasing angles to “CW” for clockwise direction when viewed from the Resolver
axis, and “CCW” for counterclockwise direction (as shown in the following diagram).
Note These settings will be enabled by turning the power supply OFF and then ON again.
3-21
Operation
Chapter 3
D Relationship between Resolver Rotation Direction and Rotation Direction Selection
Increasing angles
Increasing angles
Direction of increasing angles when
setting switch is set to “CW.”
Direction of increasing angles when
setting switch is set to “CCW.”
H Resolution Selection (SET Mode)
Select a resolution of either 360 or 720 (divisions/rotation).
D Resolution Selection Details
Function level
Function
No.
A (a)
Parameter
No.
1
Function
Resolution
selection
Setting
range
0, 1
1
2
Details
0: 360 divisions/rotation (factory setting)
1: 720 divisions/rotation
D Functions and Performances Affected by Resolution Setting
Function or Characteristic
Angle setting and display units
Permissible Resolver speed
No. of cam program steps
Number of banks
360 resolution
1° is set and displayed as “1.”
1,600 r/min
180 max.
8
720 resolution
0.5° is set and displayed as “1.”
800 r/min
360 max.
4
Note For example, to set the ON angle at 90°, the setting is “90” for a 360 resolution and “180” for a 720
resolution.
3-22
Operation
Chapter 3
D Procedure
Operation
BANK/
FUN
SET
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until “A” appears on the
Bank/Function display.
Note The display for level 1 will change from “1” to “2” through
to “8” then to “A,” “t,” “U,” and back to “1” and so on.
(When the resolution is set to 720, “5” through “8” will
not be displayed.)
Press the Set Key to enable settings to be made.
Cam/Parameter number display: “1”
SPEED/ON angle display: Flashes current setting
Press the Up or Down Keys and select the resolution to be
used.
0: 360 (divisions/rotation)
1: 720 (divisions/rotation)
SET
BANK/
FUN
Press the Set Key to confirm the settings.
The setting will stop flashing for approximately 1 second and
then resume flashing.
Note When a setting is flashing, the Up and Down Keys are
enabled and the setting can be changed.
Press the Bank/Function Key.
The display will return to only the function number appearing.
Turn OFF the power supply. (The settings will now be enabled.)
Note These functions are enabled once the power has been turned OFF and then ON again.
3-23
Operation
Chapter 3
3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking (PRGM Mode/SET
Mode)
Once the initial settings have been made, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again.
(The initial settings will be enabled once the power has been turned ON again.)
Next, create a cam program (cam output ON/OFF patterns) in PRGM mode.
Once the cam program has been created, check the number of cam program steps in
SET mode.
H Outline of Program Functions
D Cam Program Creation (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
3
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
4
5
6
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number.
Set the ON angle. (Use the Up, Down, and Forward Keys)
ON/
OFF
SET
Press the ON/OFF Switching Key and set the OFF angle. (Use the Up,
Down, and Forward Keys)
Press the Set Key to confirm the settings data.
The next step can now be input. (Return to step 4 to input more steps.)
Once a program has been created for one cam number, change the cam number (using the Cam/Parameter Key) and create another cam program in the same way. If multiple bank numbers are used,
change the bank number (using the Bank/Function Key) and create another program in the same way.
D Cam Program Checking (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
3-24
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
SET
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number.
Check the ON and OFF angles.
Press the Set Key and check the next step. (Return to step 4 of this
procedure to check the next step.)
Operation
Chapter 3
Once a program has been checked for one cam number, change the cam number (using the Cam/Parameter Key) and check another cam program in the same way. If multiple bank numbers are used,
change the bank number (using the Bank/Function Key) and check another program in the same way.
D Cam Program Deletion (PRGM Mode)
There four methods to delete cam programs. Each of these methods will be explained in this section.
• ON/OFF angle data deleted by steps.
• ON/OFF angle data deleted by cam numbers.
• ON/OFF angle data deleted by bank numbers.
• All cam programs deleted at once.
Deleting by Step (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
SET
CLR
SET
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that contains
the step to be deleted.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number that contains
the step to be deleted.
Press the Set Key to display the step to be deleted.
Press the Clear Key once. (The ON angle and OFF angle displays will
start flashing.)
Press the Set Key to delete the step.
Deleting by Cam Number (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
CLR
CLR
SET
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that contains
the cam number to be deleted.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number that is to be
deleted.
Press the Clear Key twice. (The cam number display will start flashing.)
Press the Set Key to delete the cam number.
3-25
Operation
Chapter 3
Deleting by Bank Number (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
3
4
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that is to be
deleted.
BANK/
FUN
CLR
CLR
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
CLR
SET
Press the Clear Key three times. (The bank number display will start
flashing.)
Press the Set Key to delete the bank number.
Deleting All Cam Programs (PRGM Mode)
Operation
1
2
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
Press the P⋅CLR switch to clear all cam programs in the Cam
Positioner.
Note The P⋅CLR switch will be ignored by the system, even in PRGM mode, if the trial operation function is
being used. Trial operation cannot be performed in function level 1.
D Checking Number of Programs (SET Mode)
Check the number of cam program steps that have been created.
Operation
1
2
3
4
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to SET mode.
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that contains
the cam number to be checked.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number to be checked.
The number of steps for that cam program will appear in the
SPEED/ON display.
Once the number of steps for one cam number have been checked, change the cam number (using
Cam/Parameter Key) and check another cam number in the same way.
If multiple bank numbers are used, change the bank number (using the Bank/Function Key) and check
another bank number in the same way.
3-26
Operation
Chapter 3
H Cam Program Creation (PRGM Mode)
Before creating cam programs, use the information contained in 7-7 Cam Programming
Sheet to write down the ON/OFF patterns so as to make the process easier.
D Time Chart
The following shows how to create a cam program with the following kind of ON/OFF patterns.
The resolution is set to 360 (divisions/rotation) in this example. (When the resolution is set to 720, the
ON and OFF angle values will be double the values shown here.)
Bank No. 2
Cam
No.
ON
position
OFF
position
Time chart
D Display and Operation Functions in PRGM Mode
Display Functions
Function name
Bank/Function display
Cam/Parameter No. display
SPEED/ON angle display
POSITION/OFF angle display
Display
Displays the bank numbers currently being programmed.
Displays the cam numbers currently being programmed.
Displays ON angles or errors.
Displays OFF angles.
3-27
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation Key Functions
BANK/
FUN
CAM/
PRMTR
ON/
OFF
CLR
SET
Operation keys
Bank/Function Key
Functions
Increases the bank number (used for setting bank numbers.)
Cam/Parameter Key
Increases the cam number (used for setting cam numbers.)
ON/OFF Key
Switches between ON and OFF angles.
Up Key
Increases the numeral currently flashing (used for setting ON
and OFF angles.)
Down Key
Decreases the numeral currently flashing (used for setting ON
and OFF angles.)
Forward Key
Changes the digit of the numeral to be set (used when setting
ON and OFF angles.)
Clear Key
Clears data.
Set Key
Confirms input data.
D Procedure
Operation
BANK/
FUN
Display example
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to PRGM mode.
Use the Bank/Function Key to set the bank number to be used.
The Bank/Function display will change as shown below each
time the Bank/Function Key is pressed.
1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→1 etc.
CAM/
PRMTR
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until “2” appears in the
Bank/Function display.
Note When the resolution is set to 720 (divisions/rotation), the
display will not include 5→6→7→8.
Use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number to be
used.
The Cam/Parameter No. display will change as shown below
when the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed.
1→2→3→...→15→16→1→ etc.
Keep pressing the Cam/Parameter Key until “2” appears in the
Cam/Parameter No. display.
Note For the 3F88L-162 (32-point model) Cam Positioner, the
numbers displayed will continue to “32” and then return
to “1.”
3-28
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display example
Explanation
Set the ON angle.
Under the initial settings, the rightmost digit (the first digit) will
be flashing. Press the Forward Key to move the position of the
flashing digit from the first to the second digit, from the second
to the third digit, and then back to the first digit again.
Use the Up and Down Keys to increase or decrease the
numerical value of the flashing digit. The operated digit will be
carried over.
If the Up and Down Keys are continually pressed, they will
automatically increment and decrement, and the automatic
changes will become faster the longer the key is pressed.
The ON angle for cam number two is “0” and must, therefore,
be set to “0.”
ON/
OFF
Press the ON/OFF Switching Key to set the OFF angle.
The rightmost digit (the first digit) in the POSITION/OFF display
will start flashing.
Set the OFF angle in the same way the ON angle was set.
The ON angle for cam number 2 is “90” and must, therefore, be
set to “90.”
SET
Press the Set Key to confirm the ON and OFF angle settings.
The data will stop flashing for approximately one second after
the Set Key is pressed.
Approximately one second after the Set Key has been pressed,
the next step can be input.
CAM/
PRMTR
There is only one step for cam number 2. Proceed, therefore,
to the settings for cam number 3.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key. The Cam/Parameter No.
display will change from “2” to “3.”
ON/
OFF
In step 1 of cam number 3, set the ON angle to “30” and the
OFF angle to “60.”
The setting method is the same as outlined previously.
SET
Press the Set Key to save the ON and OFF angle settings for
step 1.
When the Set Key is pressed, the data will stop flashing for
approximately one second.
Step 2 can be input approximately one second after the Set
Key has been pressed.
3-29
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display example
ON/
OFF
Explanation
In step 2 of cam number 3, set the ON angle to “150” and the
OFF angle to “180.”
The setting method is the same as outlined previously.
SET
Press the Set Key to save the ON and OFF angle settings for
step 2.
When the Set Key is pressed, the data will stop flashing for
approximately one second.
Step 3 can be input approximately one second after the Set
Key has been pressed.
ON/
OFF
In step 3 of cam number 3, set the ON angle to “270” and the
OFF angle to “300.”
The setting method is the same as outlined previously.
SET
Press the Set Key to save the ON and OFF angle settings for
step 3.
When the Set Key is pressed, the data will stop flashing for
approximately one second.
Step 4 can be input approximately one second after the Set
Key has been pressed.
The cam program is now complete.
Note 1. If there is an error with the input data, the display will change as outlined below. Check and
reset the input data.
S If data is duplicated in the ON region (the region between an ON angle and OFF angle) of a
step that has been already input.
“E-22” (cam program duplication error) will appear in the SPEED/ON angle display. Press
the Clear Key to clear the error and reset with the correct data.
S If the input numeric data exceeds the setting range.
All displays will flash twice and return to the status before the data was edited. Reset with the
correct data.
Note 2. Cam outputs turn ON at the set ON angle and turn OFF at the set OFF angle. In this cam program example, the cam output number 2 will turn ON at the point when 0° is detected and turn
OFF when 90° is detected.
3-30
Operation
Chapter 3
H Cam Program Confirmation (PRGM Mode)
Once a cam program has been created, check that it has been created correctly.
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to set to PRGM mode.
The data for step 1 of the bank and cam numbers displayed
will be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
BANK/
FUN
Use the Bank/Function Key to set the bank number to be
checked.
The Bank/Function display will change as shown below each
time the Bank/Function Key is pressed.
1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→1 etc.
CAM/
PRMTR
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until the bank number to
be checked appears.
Note When the resolution is set to 720 (divisions/rotation), the
display will not include 5→6→7→8.
Use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number to be
checked.
The Cam/Parameter No. display will change as shown below
when the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed.
1→2→3→...→15→16→1→ etc.
SET
Keep pressing the Cam/Parameter Key until the cam number
to be checked is displayed.
Note For the 3F88L-162 (32-point model) Cam Positioner, the
numbers displayed will continue to “32” and then return
to “1.”
Press the Set Key to display the data for the next step.
The display will be “-- -- --” for the last step.
SET
If the Set Key is pressed while the display shows “-- -- --,” the
data for step 1 will be displayed again.
CAM/
PRMTR
Press the Cam/Parameter Key to check the contents of other
cam numbers.
SET
The data for step 1 of the bank and cam number displayed will
be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
Press the Set Key to check data for step 2.
3-31
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display
SET
Explanation
Check the data for step 3 in the same way.
Check data through to the last step.
SET
Check the data for all cam programs that have been created.
If there are errors in any cam program, follow the procedure outlined in the previous section and set the
correct data.
H Cam Program Deletion (PRGM Mode)
This section explains how to delete cam programs after they have been created or while
they are being created.
The four methods to delete cam programs are shown below. Each of these methods will
be explained in this section.
S ON/OFF angle data deleted by steps.
S ON/OFF angle data deleted by cam numbers.
S ON/OFF angle data deleted by bank numbers.
S All cam programs deleted at once.
D Deleting by Steps
Operation
Display
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
The data for step 1 of the displayed bank and cam numbers
will be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
BANK/
FUN
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that
contains the step to be deleted.
The Bank/Function display will change as shown below each
time the Bank/Function Key is pressed.
1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→1 etc.
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until the bank number to
be set appears.
Note When the resolution is set to 720 (divisions/rotation), the
display will not include 5→6→7→8.
3-32
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display
CAM/
PRMTR
Explanation
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number that
contains the step to be deleted.
The Cam/Parameter No. display will change as shown below
when the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed.
1→2→3→...→15→16→1→ etc.
Keep pressing the Cam/Parameter Key until the
cam/parameter number to be set is displayed.
Note For the 3F88L-162 (32-point model) Cam Positioner, the
numbers displayed will continue to “32” and then return
to “1.”
Press the Set Key to display the step to be deleted.
SET
Press the Set Key to display the cam program steps in order.
Keep pressing the Set Key until the step to be deleted appears.
When the display is blank (“-- -- --”), press the Set Key to return
to step 1.
Press the Clear Key to delete the step that is displayed
CLR
If the Clear Key is pressed once, the ON angle and OFF angle
displays will start flashing (which means the step is ready to be
deleted).
Note If the Clear Key is pressed twice, the cam number will
start flashing (which means that cam number is ready to
be deleted. If the Clear Key is pressed three times, the
bank number will start flashing (which means that that
bank number is ready to be deleted). If the Clear Key is
pressed four times, the display will return to the original
display (nothing will be deleted).
Press the Set Key while the ON and OFF angle displays are
flashing, and that step will be deleted.
SET
Once the step has been deleted, the final step for that cam
number (”-- -- --”) will be displayed (ready for input).
D Deleting by Cam Number
Operation
Display
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
The data for step 1 of the bank and cam numbers displayed
will be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
BANK/
FUN
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that
contains the cam number to be deleted.
The Bank/Function display will change as shown below each
time the Bank/Function Key is pressed.
1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→1 etc.
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until the bank number to
be set appears.
Note When the resolution is set to 720 (divisions/rotation), the
display will not include 5→6→7→8.
3-33
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display
CAM/
PRMTR
Explanation
Press the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number that is
to be deleted.
The Cam/Parameter No. display will change as shown below
when the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed.
1→2→3→...→15→16→1→ etc.
CLR
Keep pressing the Cam/Parameter Key until the
cam/parameter number to be deleted is displayed.
Note For the 3F88L-162 (32-point model) Cam Positioner, the
numbers displayed will continue to “32” and then return
to “1.”
Press the Clear Key twice to delete the displayed cam number.
CLR
The cam number display will start flashing when the Clear Key
is pressed twice (which means the cam number is ready to be
deleted).
Note If the Clear Key is pressed once, the ON and OFF angle
display will start flashing (which means the step is ready
to be deleted). If the Clear Key is pressed three times,
the bank number will start flashing (which means that
that bank number is ready to be deleted). If the Clear
Key is pressed four times, the display will return to the
original display (nothing will be deleted).
While the cam number display is flashing, press the Set Key to
delete the cam number that is flashing.
SET
Once the cam number has been deleted, the ON and OFF
angle display will be “-- -- --” (which means data can be input).
D Deleting by Bank Number
Operation
Display
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
The data for step 1 of the displayed bank and cam numbers
will be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
BANK/
FUN
Press the Bank/Function Key and set the bank number that is
to be deleted.
The Bank/Function display will change as shown below each
time the Bank/Function Key is pressed.
1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→1 etc.
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until the bank number to
be deleted appears.
Note When the resolution is set to 720 (divisions/rotation), the
display will not include 5→6→7→8.
3-34
Operation
Operation
CLR
CLR
Chapter 3
Display
CLR
Explanation
Press the Clear Key three times to delete the displayed bank
number.
The bank number display will start flashing when the Clear Key
is pressed three times (which means the bank number is ready
to be deleted).
Note If the Clear Key is pressed once, the ON and OFF angle
display will start flashing (which means the step is ready
to be deleted). If the Clear Key is pressed twice, the cam
number will start flashing (which means that that cam
number is ready to be deleted). If the Clear Key is
pressed four times, the display will return to the original
display (nothing will be deleted).
While the bank number display is flashing, press the Set Key to
delete the bank number that is flashing.
SET
Once the cam number has been deleted, the ON and OFF
angle display will be “-- -- --” (which means data can be input).
D Deleting All Cam Programs
Operation
Display
Explanation
Set the mode selection switch to PRGM mode.
The data for step 1 of the displayed bank and cam numbers
will be displayed.
Note If there is no data, the display will be “-- -- --.”
Press the P⋅CLR switch to clear all cam programs in the Cam
Positioner.
Note The P⋅CLR switch will be ignored by the system, even in PRGM mode, if the trial operation function is
being used. Trial operation cannot be performed in function level 1.
H Program Number Checking (SET Mode)
The number of steps in a new program are checked in SET mode.
D Program Number Checking Information
Function level
Function No.
1 to 8
(1 to 4)
(see note 2)
Note
Parameter No.
0 to 32
(1 to 16)
(see note 1)
Function
name
Program number checking
0
1
2
Display
The number of steps for the displayed bank and cam
numbers will be shown in the SPEED/ON display.
1. The numeric values for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner are shown in parentheses.
3-35
Operation
Note
Chapter 3
2. The numeric values for 720 (divisions/rotation) resolution are shown in parentheses.
Bank No.
Cam No.
Number of steps for the
set bank and cam
numbers
Note When the parameter number (PRMTR) is “0,” the absolute angle for origin compensation is
shown in the SPEED/ON display.
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Use the Bank/Function Key to set the bank number to be
checked.
BANK/
FUN
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until the bank number to
be checked is displayed.
Use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number to be
checked.
CAM/
PRMTR
Keep pressing the Cam/Parameter Key until the cam number
to be checked is displayed.
The number of steps for that cam program will be shown in the
SPEED/ON display.
Repeat these steps to check other cam numbers.
CAM/
PRMTR
Keys other
than
BANK/
FUN
3-36
CAM/
PRMTR
Press any key other than the Cam/Parameter Key to return the
Cam/Parameter No. display to “0.”
Press the Bank/Function Key while the Cam/Parameter No.
display is “0” to display the next bank number (or function
number).
Operation
Chapter 3
3-5-4 Resolver and Machinery Connection
Once the cam programs have been completed, turn OFF the power supply (for safety)
and connect the Resolver and the machinery.
H Resolver and Machinery Connection
• Turn OFF the system power supply before connecting the Resolver and machinery.
• Follow the directions in 2-2-3 Mounting the Resolver and attach the Resolver correctly.
3-5-5 Origin Compensation
Once the Resolver and machinery have been connected, turn ON the power supply and
execute origin compensation.
H Origin Compensation Execution (SET Mode)
• Once the Resolver and machinery have been connected, turn ON the system power supply.
• Switch the Cam Positioner to SET mode and use the ADJ switch to execute origin compensation. (The
Resolver present position is set to “0” at this point.)
Note 1. Origin compensation will not be executed if the Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
Note 2. If the origin compensation value is set to a value other than “0,” parameter settings (origin
compensation value settings) must be made at function level 2. (Refer to 3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift.)
D Procedure
Operation
(Manual operation
of the machinery)
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Rotate the machinery to the position to be set to zero.
Press the ADJ switch. Origin compensation will be executed.
The absolute angle (electrical angle of the Resolver) will be
flashing in the POSITION/OFF display until origin
compensation has been completed.
(After origin
compensation has
been completed)
The original display will appear when origin compensation has
been completed.
Note If the bank number appears in the Bank/Function display
and “0” appears in the Cam/Parameter No. display, the
absolute angle for origin compensation will be displayed
in the SPEED/ON display.
Use the mode selection switch to change to RUN mode.
The speed display will be “0” and present angle will be “0” if the
machinery is not moving.
3-37
Operation
Chapter 3
Origin Compensation and Origin Shift
• Both origin compensation and origin shift functions match the mechanical origin and the Cam Positioner origin.
• The differences between origin compensation and origin shift are outlined as follows:
Origin Compensation
Press the ADJ switch in SET mode to set the present angle at that point to zero. If an origin compensation value has been set, the present angle will change to that origin compensation value. This
value (the origin position after compensation for the Resolver’s electrical 0°) will not be lost even if
the power is turned OFF.
Origin Shift
Turn ON the origin shift input (TRIG) in RUN mode to set the present angle at that point to zero. If an
origin compensation value has been set, the present angle will change to that origin compensation
value. This value will be lost if the power is turned OFF.
• Origin compensation is used to align the mechanical origin and the Cam Positioner origin, for example, when the system is first introduced, when the system is adjusted, or when Resolvers or Cam Positioners are exchanged.
Origin shift is used during normal operation when the present angle (origin) is to be changed.
• Both origin compensation and origin shift functions are enabled when the Resolver speed is less than
4 r/min. Neither function will be executed when the Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
• The absolute angle will be flashing in the POSITION/OFF display during execution of origin compensation or origin shift.
Note When origin compensation values have been set, turn OFF the power supply to the Cam Positioner, turn it ON again and then execute origin compensation or origin shift. The origin compensation
value is enabled once the power has been turned ON again. If origin compensation or origin shift
are executed without the power being turned OFF and then ON again, the origin compensation or
origin shift function will not be executed properly.
3-5-6 Start Operation (RUN Mode)
Once origin compensation has been executed, check the operation of the machinery.
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to RUN mode.
Bank No. specified at bank selection
input (BANK1 to 3)
Blank when operation start input signal
(START) is OFF.
Present angle
Resolver speed (r/min)
3-38
Operation
Operation
Bank selection input
((BANK1 to 3))
Chapter 3
Display
Explanation
Use the control input bank selection input (BANK1 to 3) to
specify the bank number to be used.
24 V DC
RUN
Operation start input
(START)
Set bank number
(BANK 1 to 3)
E.g.:To set bank No. 2:
BANK 1:ON
BANK 2: OFF
BANK 3: OFF
Note Refer to 3-5-8 Control I/O Signals for information on the
relationship between bank selection input (BANK1 to 3)
and execution bank numbers.
Turn ON the operation start input signal (START) for control
input.
When cam output is enabled, the control output RUN output
signal (RUN) is turned ON.
24 V DC
24V
Turn ON the operation
start signal (START).
Machinery operation
starts
Note When the operation start signal (START) is turned ON,
“ru” will appear in the Cam/Parameter No. display.
Start up the machinery and start operation.
Note Observe the movement of peripheral devices to check if
the cam output signals are being output at the correct
timing.
Note
1. To change the ON and OFF angles, follow the directions in 3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking
and change the angle data.
Note
2. Use the compensation operation function to change the angle data during operation. Refer to 3-6 Applied Functions for details.
3-39
Operation
Chapter 3
3-5-7 I/O Monitor Function (RUN Mode)
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioners have the following monitor functions in RUN
mode. If the system does not perform properly at start up, use this monitor function first
and check the I/O status.
S Resolver speed and present angle
S Error display
S Cam output status
S Control I/O signal status
H Resolver Speed and Present Angle Monitoring (RUN Mode)
If the Cam Positioner is set to RUN mode, the Resolver speed (r/min) will be displayed in the SPEED/
ON display and the present angle (in 1° units for 360 resolution and 0.5° units for 720 resolution) is displayed in the POSITION/OFF display.
Bank No. being executed
“ru”: Shows that START input is ON in RUN mode.
Present angle
Resolver speed
H Error Display
If an error is generated, an error code (E--**) will appear in the SPEED/ON display.
If an error has been generated, refer to Chapter 5 Operation for countermeasures.
Error code
3-40
Operation
Chapter 3
H Cam Outputs and Control I/O Signal Monitoring (RUN Mode)
Function No.
o (%)
Parameter No.
1
2
Function
name
Cam output
monitor
Display
ON/OFF state of cam outputs 1 to 32 (see note) will be
displayed by lighting or not lighting each one of the
7-segment indicators (lit when cam is OFF).
Control I/O sig- ON/OFF state of control I/O signals (see note) will be
nal monitor
displayed by lighting or not lighting each one of the
7-segment indicators (lit when signal is OFF).
Note The 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner does not have cam outputs 17 to 32. (The relevant
indicators will remain OFF.)
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Press the Bank/Function Key.
BANK/
FUN
The Bank/Function display will show “0” and the
Cam/Parameter No. display will show “1.”
The ON/OFF status of cam outputs will be shown in the
SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF displays.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key.
CAM/
PRMTR
Keys other
than
Explanation
(Displayed in normal RUN mode.)
CAM/
PRMTR
The Cam/Parameter No. display will show “2,” and the ON/OFF
status of the control I/O signals will be shown in the
SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF displays.
Press any key other than the Cam/Parameter Key to return to
the display for normal RUN mode.
D Cam Output Monitor Display
• SPEED/ON
• POSITION/OFF
3-41
Operation
Chapter 3
D Control I/O Signal Monitor Display
• SPEED/ON (Control output)
• POSITION/OFF (Control input)
3-5-8 Control I/O Signals
In addition to cam outputs (CAM 1 to 16/CAM 1 to 32), the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioners also have the control inputs and outputs described below. Refer to 2-3-3 Terminal
Block Wiring for information on wiring control I/O signals.
Cam outputs
BANK 1 to 3
(select the bank number
to be executed)
RUN output
(enables cam outputs)
START input
(starts cam outputs)
M-DET output
(outputs detection of
Resolver rotation)
TRIG input
(executes origin shift)
RESET input
(hardware reset)
Cam Positioner
ERROR output
(outputs errors)
H Control Inputs
Name
Bank selection
input
p
Symbol
BANK1
BANK2
BANK3
Operation start
input
START
Function
Bank selection input selects which Cam Positioner bank number will be
executed. Turns ON when this signal is short-circuited with the 0V.
Execution
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
bank
BANK1
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
BANK2
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF ON
ON
BANK3
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
ON
Note Refer to 7-2 Performance for information on bank selection
timing when in operation mode.
When the operation start input is turned ON in RUN mode, the operation
will start and cam outputs are enabled.
When operation start input is turned OFF in RUN mode, cam outputs
are disabled.
Note 1. START input is ignored when the Unit is in modes other than
RUN.
3-42
Note
2. Cam outputs will turn ON and OFF during a trial operation in
PRGM mode, regardless of the START input status.
Note
3. Refer to ntl7-2 Performance for information on delay times for
cam outputs and RUN outputs after START input is turned ON.
Operation
Name
Origin shift input
Chapter 3
Symbol
TRIG
Function
When the origin shift input is turned from OFF to ON in RUN mode,
origin shift is executed.
Note 1. TRIG input is ignored when the Unit is in modes other than RUN.
Note
2. TRIG input is disabled when Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
Note
3. The TRIG signal is enabled when it has been turned ON for
10 ms or longer.
4. Refer to 7-2 Performance for information on the relationship between TRIG inputs, RUN outputs, and cam outputs.
Regardless of the current operation mode, hardware reset is performed
when the reset input is turned ON and the system will return to the
startup status.
Note 1. All outputs will turn OFF, regardless of the output hold settings.
Note
Reset input
RESET
Note
2. The origin values retained for origin shift will be lost.
H Control Outputs
Name
RUN output
Symbol
RUN
Function
ON: Cam outputs enabled
OFF: Cam outputs disabled
In any of the following circumstances, cam outputs will be enabled if no
errors have been generated.
• When the START signal is ON in RUN mode (including during compensation operation)
• When the trial operation function is started in PRGM mode.
Cam outputs will be disabled under any of the following circumstances.
• When the START signal is OFF in RUN mode.
• When an error has been generated (error code E--** or a watchdog error).
(Refer to 5-1 Diagnosis using Error Codes.)
• When changing from RUN to PRGM mode or from RUN to SET mode.
Resolver rotation
detection output
M-DET
• When the trial operation function is completed in PRGM mode.
Note Refer to 7-2 Performance for information on ON and OFF delay
times for RUN outputs.
ON: When Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater
Error output
ERROR
OFF: When Resolver speed is less than 4 r/min or an error has been
generated. (Refer to 5-1 Diagnosis using Error Codes.)
Note Refer to 7-2 Performance for information on ON and OFF delay
times when the Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
ON: While error code E--** or watchdog errors have not been generated.
OFF: When an error code E--** or watchdog error has been generated
(Refer to 5-1 Diagnosis using Error Codes). Alternatively, during
initialization when the power is turned ON. (Refer to 7-2 Performance
for information on initialization times.)
3-43
Operation
3-6
Chapter 3
Applied Functions
Function selection (Function No. U) must be set to “2” (all functions) before the applied
functions can be used for 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioners.
3-6-1 Function Level Selection Setting (SET Mode)
H Function Level Selection Setting and Checking
Check if the function level is set to function level 2 (all functions). If another function level is set, change
the setting to function level 2 (all functions).
Function level
Function
No.
U (u)
Parameter
No.
1
Function
name
Function
level
selection
Setting
range
0 to 2
0
1
2
Details
0: Function level 0 (monitor only)
1: Function level 1 (basic operation/monitor
only) (factory setting)
2: Function level 2 (all functions)
D Procedure
Set the function level selection to “2” (function level 2).
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
BANK/
FUN
Keep pressing the Bank/Function Key until “U” appears on the display.
Note The display will change from 1→2→....→8→A→t→U→1→.. in the
basic settings.
Press the Set Key to allow settings to be made.
SET
• Cam/Parameter number display: “1”
• SPEED/ON angle display: Flashes current setting
If the setting value is not “2,” use the Up Key and change the setting to
“2” (all functions).
0: Monitor
1: Basic settings
2: All functions
If the setting is not on “2,” use the Up or Down Key to change to “2”
(all functions).
0: Monitor
1: Basic settings
2: All functions
3-44
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Display
Explanation
Press the Set Key to confirm the settings.
The setting will stop flashing for approximately 1 second and then
resume flashing.
Note When a setting is flashing, the Up and Down Keys are enabled
and the setting may be changed.
Press the Bank/Function Key.
SET
The display will return to only the function number that appears.
BANK/
FUN
Turn OFF the power supply. (The settings will now be enabled.)
Note 1. The functions are enabled once the power has been turned OFF and then ON again.
Note 2. The display will change as shown below when the Bank/Function Key is pressed repeatedly
to set the function number.
Function level 0: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→U→1→etc.
Function level 1: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→A→t→U→1→etc.
Function level 2: 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→A→b→C→d→F→H→P→t→U→1→etc.
If the resolution selection (explained in the next section) is set to “1” (720 divisions/rotation),
“5→6→7→8” will not be displayed.
3-6-2 Parameter List (SET Mode)
Bank/Func- Cam/Parame- Function name
tion
ter
1 to 8
0
Origin
(1 to 4)
compensation
(see note 2)
absolute angle
A (a)
Setting
range
---
1 to 32
(1 to 16)
(see note 1)
Program number
checking
---
1
Resolution
selection
0, 1
SPEED/ON
POSITION/OFF
Displays the
--absolute angle for
origin compensation
(display only, no
settings can be
made).
Displays the number --of steps for the
displayed bank or
cam number
(display only, no
settings can be
made).
0: 360 divisions/
--revolution (factory
setting)
1: 720 divisions/
revolution
3-45
Operation
Chapter 3
Bank/Func- Cam/Parame- Function name
tion
ter
1
Origin
b (b)
compensation
value
Setting
range
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
2
Backlash
compensation
value
0 to 179
(0 to 359)
(see note 2)
3
Advance angle
compensation
value 1
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
4
Advance angle
compensation
value 2
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
5
Advance angle
compensation
value 3
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
6
Baud rate
1, 2
c (c)
---
Cam protect
---
d (d)
---
Teaching
---
3-46
SPEED/ON
Sets origin
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets backlash
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
POSITION/OFF
---
---
---
Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
2.
Factory setting “0.”
--Sets angle data for
advance angle
value 2.
Factory setting “0.”
--Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
3 (advance angle
compensated
position).
Factory setting “0.”
1: 9,600 bps
--(factory setting)
2: 19,200 bps
Protection can be
set or released for
each cam number
or for all cams in a
bank number.
(Factory setting:
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as ON angle data.
Protect can be set
or released for each
cam number or for
all cams in a bank
number (Factory
setting
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as OFF angle data.
Operation
Chapter 3
Bank/Func- Cam/Parame- Function name
tion
ter
--One-direction
F (f)
function setting
Setting
range
0 to 2
SPEED/ON
---
POSITION/OFF
0: One-direction
function disabled
(factory setting)
1: Enabled in
forward direction
H (h)
1
2
3
4
Backlash
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Advance angle
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Output hold
Present value
output setting
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0 to 4
0: Backlash
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Backlash
compensation
enabled
0: Advance angle
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Advance angle
compensation
enabled
0: Output hold
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Output hold
enabled
0: No present value
output function
(factory setting)
2: Enabled in
reverse direction
---
---
---
---
1: 4-digit present
angle (no units)
2: 4-digit number of
rotations (no
units)
3: Automatic
switching of
3-digit present
angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
4: Automatic
switching of
4-digit present
angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
3-47
Operation
Chapter 3
Bank/Func- Cam/Parame- Function name
tion
ter
--Pulse output
P (p)
setting
(see note 4)
t (t)
(see note 4)
Setting
range
---
0
Data transfer
(Slave setting)
---
1
Data transfer
(Master setting)
0 to 3
SPEED/ON
Writes pulse output
program to any
bank or cam
number (sets pulse
number).
(Operates on a
command issued
from Master Unit)
0: Disabled (factory
setting)
POSITION/OFF
(Sets pulse start
position.)
-----
1: Read data
2: Write data
U (u)
1
Function level
selection
0 to 2
3: Verify data
0: Function level 0
(monitor only)
---
1: Function level 1
(basic
operation/monitor
only) (factory
setting)
2: Function level 2
(all functions)
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
Note 3. Functions A, b, C, F, H, and U will be enabled after the power has been turned OFF and then
ON again.
Note 4. Functions P and t are special operations that are not stored as parameters.
3-48
Operation
Chapter 3
3-6-3 Parameter Explanation and Operation
H Explanation
In this section, individual parameters will be explained in the following format.
Parameter name
Function level setting
D Origin Compensation Value
Function b (b)
No.
Parameter
No.
Function level
1
2
Setting range 0 to 359 (0 to 719) (see note 1)
• (Function explanation)
Note (Additional information)
• Parameter Name
Parameter names such as “origin compensation value” and “backlash compensation value” will appear here.
• Function Level Setting
The function level at which this parameter can be set will appear here.
In the above example, this parameter can be set at function level 2 (all functions) only.
• Function No.
The function number of this parameter will appear here.
The 7-segment indicator display will appear in parentheses after function numbers that appear as
letters (rather than numerals).
• Parameter No.
The parameter number for this parameter will appear here.
• Setting Range
The setting range for this parameter will appear here.
• Function Explanation
The functions and factory settings for this parameter will be explained here.
• Additional Information
Additional information for items with “See note” as well as information on restrictions or cautions
pertaining to the use of that function will appear here.
H Items to be Checked before Setting Parameters
The functions and parameter setting for 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioners will be explained in the next
section. Before proceeding, be sure to check that the following two settings have been made.
• Set the function level (Function No. U) to “2” (function level 2).
• Set the resolution selection (Function No. A) to the resolution to be used.
Once these settings have been made, turn OFF the Cam Positioner and then turn it ON again.
If additional parameters are set without the power being turned OFF and then ON again, the function
levels and resolution selections will not be enabled and the parameters, therefore, will not be set properly.
3-49
Operation
Chapter 3
H Operation
The method for basic parameter display and settings is shown in the following diagram.
Change to SET mode (using the mode selection switch)
Set the function number with the Bank/Function Key
When setting parameters for a different function number.
Press the Set Key
Individual operations (display parameters)
When setting parameters for the same function number.
(Use the Cam/Parameter Key to change the parameter
number).
Set parameters (set parameter values)
D Individual Operations
Individual operations differ for each parameter. A status flowchart, like the one shown below, will be
shown for each parameter in each section.
The following example shows the status flowchart when displaying function No. b parameters.
Origin
compensation
value
Backlash compensation value
Baud rate
Note Set the function number (use the Bank/Function Key to change the function number and press the
Set Key), display the parameter numbers, and then use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the
parameter numbers (for functions with multiple parameter numbers). The parameter number will
increase each time the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed. If the Cam/Parameter Key is pressed on
the last parameter number (parameter number 6 in the above example), the display will return to
parameter number 1.
3-50
Operation
Chapter 3
D Setting Parameters
Once the parameters have been displayed using the individual operations, perform the following operations to set the parameter data.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to increase or decrease the numeric value of the digit that is flashing.
• Press the Forward Key to shift to the next digit to the left. If the Forward Key is pressed while the leftmost digit is flashing, the rightmost digit will start flashing.
• If a parameter has two items to be set (e.g., advance angle compensation value 1), the data will be
displayed in the SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF displays.
• As the final step, press the Set Key to confirm the settings. When the Set Key is pressed, the data will
remain lit for approximately one second and then one of the digits will start flashing again.
3-51
Operation
Chapter 3
H Display Changes in SET Mode
Origin compensation absolute angle (display)
Program number checking (display)
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
Bank number 1, cam number 1,
step number (display)
Up to cam number 16 or 3F88L-160
Keys
other
than
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
Any key
Bank number 2, cam number 1,
step number (display)
Keys
other
than
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
Note: Up to bank number 4
for 720 resolution
Bank number 1, cam number 32,
step number (display)
Bank number 2, cam number 32,
step number (display)
Up to cam number 16 or 3F88L-160
Any key
Bank number 8, cam number 1,
step number (display)
Keys
other
than
Bank number 8, cam number 32,
step number (display)
Up to cam number 16 or 3F88L-160
Any key
Resolution
selection
Resolution selection
Various compensation values and baud rate setting
Origin compensation value
3-52
Backlash compensation value
Advance angle
compensation value 1
(speed data)
Advance angle
compensation value 2
(speed data)
Advance angle compensation
data 1 (angle data)
Advance angle compensation
data 2 (angle data)
Various compensation values
and baud rate setting
Operation
Chapter 3
Advance angle compensation value 3
Baud rate
Cam protect
Cam protect (bank number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 1,
cam number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 1,
cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160
Cam protect setting
Cam protect (bank number 2)
Cam protect (bank number 2,
cam number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 2, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Cam protect (bank number 8)
Cam protect (bank number 8,
cam number 1)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Note: Up to bank number
4 for 720 resolution
Teaching
Teaching (bank number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 8, cam number 32)
Teaching (bank number 1,
cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 1, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Teaching (bank number 2,
cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 2, cam number 32)
Teaching
Teaching (bank number 2)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Teaching (bank number 8)
Note: Up to bank number
4 for 720 resolution
Teaching (bank number 8, cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 8, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
3-53
Operation
Chapter 3
One-direction function setting
One-direction function
(bank number 1)
One-direction function (bank
number 1, cam number 1)
One-direction function (bank
number 1, cam number 32)
One-direction function setting
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
One-direction function (bank number 2)
Various compensation value enable/disable, output hold, and present value output settings
One-direction function (bank
number 2, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160
One-direction function (bank number 8)
Various compensation
value enable/disable
settings
3-54
One-direction function (bank
number 2, cam number 1)
One-direction function (bank
number 8, cam number 1)
Note: Up to bank number
4 for 720 resolution
Backlash compensation enable/disable
Advance angle compensation enable/disable
Output hold
Current value output setting
One-direction function (bank
number 8, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Operation
Pulse output settings
Chapter 3
Pulse output (bank number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 1,
cam number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 1,
cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Pulse output settings
Pulse output (bank number 2)
Pulse output (bank number 2,
cam number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 2,
cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Pulse output (bank number 8)
Note: Up to bank number
4 for 720 resolution
Data transfer
Data transfer
Pulse output (bank number 8,
cam number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 8,
cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160
Data transfer (Slave settings)
Data transfer (Master settings)
Function level selection
Function level
selection
Function level selection
Origin compensation absolute angle (display)
3-55
Operation
Chapter 3
3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift
H Functions
• Both origin compensation and origin shift functions match the mechanical origin and the Cam Positioner origin.
• The differences between origin compensation and origin shift are outlined as follows:
Origin Compensation
Press the ADJ switch in SET mode to set the present angle at that point to zero. If an origin compensation value has been set, the present angle will change to that origin compensation value. This
value (the origin position after compensation for the Resolver’s electrical 0°) will not be lost even if
the power is turned OFF.
Origin Shift
Turn ON the origin shift input (TRIG) in RUN mode to set the present angle at that point to zero. If an
origin compensation value has been set, the present angle will change to that origin compensation
value. This value will be lost if the power is turned OFF.
• Origin compensation is used to align the mechanical origin and the Cam Positioner origin, for example, when the system is first introduced, when the system is adjusted, or when Resolvers or Cam Positioners are exchanged.
Origin shift is used during normal operation when the present angle (origin) is to be changed.
• Both origin compensation and origin shift functions are enabled when the Resolver speed is less than
4 r/min. Neither function will be executed when the Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
• The absolute angle will be flashing in the POSITION/OFF display during execution of origin compensation or origin shift.
Note 1. When origin compensation values have been set, turn OFF the power supply to the Cam Positioner, turn it ON again and then execute origin compensation or origin shift. The origin compensation value is enabled once the power has been turned ON again. If origin compensation
or origin shift are executed without the power being turned OFF and then ON again, the origin
compensation or origin shift function will not be executed properly.
Note 2. When origin shift has been used to change the origin position, the origin position value will be
lost when the power is turned OFF. The present angle after the power is turned ON again will,
therefore, be different from the present angle before the power was turned OFF and the cam
output timing will be out of synch. When using origin shift, stop the machinery and turn ON the
power supply while the START input is OFF. Execute origin shift at the correct position and
then turn ON the START input and start the machinery operation.
H Example Operation
• When the origin compensation value is “0” (resolution: 360)
Present angle before
compensation
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Y Execution position for origin
compensation/origin shift
Present angle after
compensation
3-56
357
358
359
0
1
2
3
Operation
Chapter 3
• When the origin compensation value is “200” (resolution: 360)
Present angle before
compensation
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Y Execution position for origin
compensation/origin shift
Present angle after
compensation
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Origin Compensation Value
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
1
2
Setting range 0 to 359 (0 to 719) (see note 1)
• Use this parameter to set the present angle for when origin compensation or origin shift function is
executed.
• If this value is set to “0” (factory setting), the present angle will change to the origin (0°) when the origin
compensation or origin shift function is executed.
Note 1. The numeric values for 720 (divisions/rotation) resolution are shown in parentheses.
Note 2. This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON again.
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Origin
compensation
value
Backlash compensation value
Baud rate
• When the origin compensation value (Function No. b, Parameter No. 1) is displayed, the present setting will be displayed in the SPEED/ON display and the first digit (rightmost digit) will flash.
• Use the Forward, Up, and Down Keys to change the data.
• Press the Set Key and the data will remain lit for approximately one second, the setting will be confirmed, and the display will resume flashing.
• If the data is inappropriate and the Set Key is pressed, all displays will flash twice and then return to the
settings before the data was edited. Re-input the correct data.
• Press the Clear Key to return the data to the factory settings. If the Clear Key is pressed, the three
digits of data will start flashing. Press the Set Key while the data is flashing and the display will change
to “-- -- --” and the factory settings will be restored. If the Clear Key is pressed again while the three digits
of data are flashing, the data will not be initialized and the display will return to the edited state.
3-57
Operation
Chapter 3
Function level
D Origin Compensation Absolute Angle (Display)
Function
No.
1 to 8 (1 to 4)
(see note)
Parameter
No.
0
0
1
2
Setting range (Display only)
• Use this parameter to display the origin compensation absolute angle (origin position after origin compensation or origin shift for the Resolver’s electrical 0°) in the SPEED/ON display.
• If the parameter number is “0,” the same numeric value will be displayed, regardless of the function
number (1 to 8 or 1 to 4).
Note The numeric values for 720 (divisions/rotation) resolution are shown in parentheses.
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
Origin compensation
absolute angle (display)
H Origin Compensation Execution (SET Mode)
D Procedure
Operation
(Manual operation
of the machinery)
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Rotate the machinery to the position to be set to zero.
Press the ADJ switch. Origin compensation will be executed.
The absolute angle (electrical angle of the Resolver) will be
flashing in the POSITION/OFF display until origin
compensation has been completed.
(After origin
compensation has
been completed)
The original display will appear when origin compensation has
been completed.
Note If the bank number appears in the Bank/Function display
and “0” appears in the Cam/Parameter No. display, the
absolute angle for origin compensation will be displayed
in the SPEED/ON display.
Use the mode selection switch to change to RUN mode.
The speed display will be “0” and present angle will be “0” if the
machinery is not operating.
3-58
Operation
Chapter 3
H Origin Shift Execution (RUN Mode)
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to RUN mode.
(Manual
operation of
the
machinery)
Rotate the machinery to the position to be set as zero (or to the origin
compensation value).
Origin shift
input (TRIG)
Turn ON the origin shift input (TRIG) to execute origin shift.
The absolute angle (Resolver’s electrical angle) will flash in the
POSITION/OFF display until origin shift has been completed.
24 V DC
Turn ON origin shift
input (TRIG)
(After origin
shift has been
completed)
The original display will appear when origin shift has been completed.
The speed display will be “0” and present angle will be “0” if the
machinery is not operating.
3-59
Operation
Chapter 3
3-6-5 Backlash Compensation
H Functions
• The backlash compensation function absorbs mechanical looseness by creating a gap between the
detection angles in the CW and CCW directions.
• If a compensation value equivalent to the mechanical looseness is set, the cam outputs can match the
mechanical position.
• This function is effective for machinery that rotate in both directions. Backlash compensation is not
required for machinery that rotates in one direction only.
• If backlash compensation values are set, the display will not change until the machine has rotated in
the opposite direction through a number of degrees for the backlash compensation amount.
• The backlash compensation function operates when the “backlash compensation enable/disable” parameter is set to “enable.”
Backlash
Absorbs looseness in
CW and CCW direction.
Resolver
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Backlash Compensation Value
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
2
Setting range 0 to 179 (0 to 359) (see note 1)
• Use this parameter to set the angle equivalent to the mechanical looseness (backlash).
• The factory setting is “0.”
Note 1. The numeric values for 720 (divisions/rotation) resolution are shown in parentheses.
Note 2. This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON again.
3-60
2
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Origin
compensation
value
Backlash compensation value
Baud rate
• When the backlash compensation value (Function No. b, Parameter No. 2) is displayed, the present
setting will be displayed in the SPEED/ON display and the first digit (rightmost digit) will flash.
• Use the Forward, Up, and Down Keys to change the data.
• Press the Set Key and the data will remain lit for approximately one second, the setting will be confirmed, and the display will resume flashing.
• If the data is inappropriate and the Set Key is pressed, all displays will flash twice and then return to the
settings before the data was edited. Re-input the correct data.
• Press the Clear Key to return the data to the factory settings. If the Clear Key is pressed, the three
digits of data will start flashing. Press the Set Key while the data is flashing and the display will change
to “-- -- --” and the factory settings will be restored. If the Clear Key is pressed again while the three digits
of data are flashing, the data will not be initialized and the display will return to the edited state.
Function level
D Backlash Compensation Enable/Disable
Function
No.
Parameter
No.
H (h)
1
2
Setting range 0, 1
• Set this parameter to “1” to enable backlash compensation. (0: backlash compensation disabled;
1: backlash compensation enabled)
• The factory setting is “0.”
Note This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON again.
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Various compensation value
enable/disable setting
Backlash
compensation
enable/disable
Advance angle compensation
enable/disable
Present value
output setting
3-61
Operation
Chapter 3
• When the backlash compensation enable/disable setting (Function No. H, Parameter No. 1) is displayed, the current settings will be flashing in the SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to change the data.
• When the Set Key is pressed, the data will remain lit for approximately one second, the setting will be
confirmed, and then the data will resume flashing.
3-6-6 Advance Angle Compensation
H Functions
• The advance angle compensation function advances the ON and OFF angles for all cams in proportion to the speed of the Resolver.
• When cam output signals are used to move peripheral devices, this function is used to adjust the timing of peripheral device movement. This function can also be used to minimize angle deviation caused
by a delay in signal transmission.
• There are three advance angle compensation parameters for 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioners.
Advance angle compensation value 1: Speed and angle data settings
Advance angle compensation value 2: Speed and angle data settings
Advance angle compensation value 3: Angle data settings for advance angle compensation position
The relationship between the Resolver speed and advance angle is set in the first two parameters,
advance angle compensation values 1 and 2. The third parameter, advance angle compensation
value 3 indicates the position where the advance angle is to be changed. (For example, if the advance angle amount changes from 0° to 1°, the angle must be increased by 1° somewhere in the
rotation. This parameter designates the position for that increase.)
• The advance angle compensation function operates when the “advance angle compensation enable/
disable setting” parameter is set to “enable.”
3-62
Operation
Chapter 3
D Timing Compensation Example
• This example shows a peripheral device (cylinder) operating on workpieces on a conveyor belt. In this
application, the Resolver is mounted on the drive axle of the conveyor and the drive signal for the cylinder is output by the Cam Positioner.
A: Working position
B: Drive signal output position for 100 r/min
Peripheral device
(cylinder)
C: Drive signal output position for 200 r/min
The cylinder and workpiece
are timed to coincide here.
Conveyor
Resolver
Cam Positioner
Drive signal
(cam output)
• The position where work is performed by the cylinder on the workpiece is indicated by A. If the conveyor is moving and the drive signal (cam output) is output when the workpiece has arrived at position A,
the workpiece will have already left that position when the cylinder descends. Therefore, the drive signal must be output at an earlier point. That point is determined by the speed of the conveyor and the
cylinder descending time. If the conveyor speed is high, the drive speed must be output earlier. For
example, if the drive signal output position for a Resolver speed of 100 r/min is B, then the drive signal
output position will be C for a speed of 200 r/min.
• If the cylinder descending time is constant, the distance between the drive signal output position and
the work position A will be proportional to the Resolver speed. This proportional relationship is set as
an advance angle compensation parameter and enables the cylinder descending time and the arrival
of the workpiece to coincide, regardless of the conveyor speed (Resolver speed).
3-63
Operation
Chapter 3
• A setting example is shown in the following diagram.
Advance
angle
amount
Set angle
(distance
between
A and B)
Resolver speed
(r/min)
Set speed (100 r/min)
Note
For example, set the speed to 100 r/min and set a Resolver angle corresponding to the distance between A and B as the set angle.
• For example, if the advance angle amount is 5° for 100 r/min (when the distance between A and B
corresponds to a Resolver angle of 5°), the advance angle compensation will be as shown below.
Cam program
settings
Cam outputs
at 100 r/min
Cam outputs
at 200 r/min
When advance angle compensation value 1 is set.
Advance
angle
amount
Advance angle amount =
Set angle ÷ Set speed × Resolver speed
Set angle
Saturation speed =
Set speed ÷ Set angle × 359 (or 719)
Set speed
Saturation speed
Resolver speed (r/min)
Note The maximum compensation value is 359 (for 360 resolution) or 719 (for 720 resolution). compensation greater than one rotation cannot be made.
3-64
Operation
Chapter 3
When advance angle compensation values 1 and 2 are set.
Advance
angle
amount
Advance angle amount =
Set angle 1 + (Set angle 2 -- Set angle 1) ÷ (Set
speed 2 -- Set speed 1) × (Resolver speed -- Set
speed 1)
Set angle 2
Set angle 1
Advance angle amount =
Set angle 1 ÷ Set speed 1 × Resolver speed
Saturation speed =
Set speed 1 + (359 (or 719) -- Set angle 1) ÷
(Set angle 2 -- Set angle 1) × (Set speed 2 -- Set
speed 1)
Set
speed 1
Set
speed 2
Saturation
speed
Resolver speed (r/min)
Note 1. The data for advance angle compensation value with the lower speed (out of advance angle
compensation values 1 and 2) will become the set speed 1 and the set angle 1.
Note 2. The maximum compensation value is 359 (for 360 resolution) or 719 (for 720 resolution). A
compensation greater than one rotation cannot be made.
Note 3. Except for 0, the same speed data cannot be set for advance angle compensation values 1
and 2.
When advance angle compensation values 1 and 2 are set and the set angle 2 is
smaller than the set angle 1.
Advance
angle
amount
Set angle 1
Advance angle amount =
Set angle 1 ÷ Set speed 1 × Resolver speed
Set angle 2
Advance angle amount =
Set angle 1 + (Set angle 2 -- Set angle 1) ÷ (Set
speed 2 -- Set speed 1) × (Resolver speed -- Set
speed 1)
Set
speed 1
Set
speed 2
Resolver speed (r/min)
Saturation
speed
Saturation speed =
Set speed 1 + Set angle 1 ÷ (Set angle 1 -- Set angle 2) × (Set
speed 2 -- Set speed 1)
Note The lowest compensation value is 0.
3-65
Operation
Chapter 3
Advance Angle Compensation Function Processing
Detects Resolver angle
Detects Resolver speed
Calculates advance angle amount
from the advance angle compensation
values 1 and 2.
Calculates advance angle
amount
Adds the advance angle amount
to the Resolver angle.
Re-writes advance angle
amount
The advance angle amount is
re-written when the present angle
equals the advance angle
compensation value 3 parameter.
Calculates and displays the
present angle
Note
1. Resolver angle detection and Resolver speed detection are performed in different cycles.
Note
2. The “Resolver angle” is the angle after origin compensation (or origin shift) has been performed for
the electrical absolute angle of the Resolver.
S For example, assume that the advance angle compensation value 3 is set to “30” and the result of
the advance angle calculation has changed from “0” to “1.” This calculation result is reflected, not
immediately but when the present angle reaches “30.” In other words, when the present angle “30”
is detected, the present angle is compensated to “31.” When this compensation is performed,
therefore, present angle “30” is skipped. (An operation example is shown below.)
Resolver angle
25
26
Advance angle amount
Present angle
27
28
29
30
31
32
0
25
26
27
33
34
35
36
35
36
37
1
28
29
31
32
33
34
S The processing is the same when the advance angle amount is to be reduced. For example, if the
advance angle amount changes from “10” to “5,” the Resolver angle, advance angle amount, and
present angles will be as shown below. In this instance, the present angles “25” through “29” are
repeated.
Resolver angle
15
16
Advance angle amount
Present angle
17
18
19
20
21
22
10
25
26
27
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
5
28
29
25
26
27
28
In this way, the present angles do not continue in numerical order from the angle where the present
angle and the advance angle compensation value 3 coincide. The following points must be taken
into consideration, therefore, when using the advance angle compensation function.
S Set advance angle compensation value 3 in a section where the cam output does not change. (Set
in the middle of a section where ON or OFF status continues for a long time.)
S As much as possible, do not operate the machinery while the advance angle amount is changing
(accelerating or decelerating.) (Start real operation after the speed has stabilized.)
S If the machinery must be operated during acceleration or deceleration, change the system settings to minimize the change in advance angle amounts as much as possible. (Consider gentle
acceleration or deceleration and minimizing the change in advance angle amount or speeding up
the peripheral devices (or slowing down the drive axle side) and reducing the size of the compensation amount itself.)
3-66
Operation
Chapter 3
S Make sure that the machinery is operating normally.
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Advance Angle Compensation Value 1
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
3
2
Setting range Speed data : 0 to 1600 (800)
(see note 1)
Angle data: 0 to 359 (719) (see
note 1)
Function level
D Advance Angle Compensation Value 2
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
4
2
Setting range Speed data: 0 to 1600 (800)
(see note 1)
Angle data: 0 to 359 (719) (see
note 1)
• Use these parameters to set the Resolver speed and advance angle amount.
• The Resolver speed (r/min) is set as the speed data and the compensation amount is set as the angle
data.
• The factory settings for both speed and angle data is “0.”
Note 1. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. When the speed data is set to “0,” the angle data can only be set to “0.”
Note 3. The same speed data cannot be set for advance angle compensation values 1 and 2, unless
the settings are “0.”
Note 4. These parameters are enabled by turning OFF the power supply and turning it ON again.
D Advance Angle Compensation Value 3
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
5
Function level
2
Setting range 0 to 359 (0 to 719) (see note 1)
• Use this parameter to set the point to change the angle based on the advance angle compensation.
For example, if the advance angle amount changes from “0” to “1,” the angle must increase by “1”
somewhere in the rotation. This parameter sets the position for that change. The advance angle
amount is updated when the Resolver angle matches advance angle compensation amount 3.
• The factory setting is “0.”
Note 1. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. Set advance angle compensation value 3 in a section where the cam output does not change.
(Set in the middle of a section where ON or OFF status continues for a long time.) If cam outputs with short ON/OFF durations are set near advance angle compensation value 3, cam
outputs may not be made (if the advance angle amount is increasing) or may be output twice
(if the advance angle amount is decreasing).
Note 3. These parameters are enabled by turning OFF the power supply and turning it ON again.
3-67
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Origin compensation value
Backlash compensation value
Advance angle compensation value 1 (speed data)
Advance angle compensation value 1
(angle data)
Advance angle compensation value 2 (speed data)
Advance angle compensation value 2
(angle data)
Advance angle compensation value 3
Baud rate
• If the advance angle compensation value (Function No. b, Parameters 3 to 5) is displayed, the present
settings will be displayed in the SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF displays and the first digit (rightmost
digit) will be flashing. (The SPEED/ON display will be blank for advance angle compensation value 3.)
• Use the Forward, Up, and Down Keys to change the data. (For advance angle compensation values 1
and 2, use the ON/OFF Switching Key to switch between speed and angle data.)
• Press the Set Key and the data will remain lit for approximately one second, the setting will be confirmed, and the display will resume flashing.
• If the data is inappropriate and the Set Key is pressed, all displays will flash twice and then return to the
settings before the data was edited. Re-input the correct data.
3-68
Operation
Chapter 3
• Press the Clear Key to return the data to the factory settings. If the Clear Key is pressed, the three
digits of data will start flashing. Press the Set Key while the data is flashing and the display will change
to “-- -- --” and the factory settings will be restored. If the Clear Key is pressed again while the data is
flashing, the data will not be initialized and the display will return to the edited status.
D Advance Angle Compensation Enable/Disable
Function
No.
Parameter
No.
H (h)
2
Function level
2
Setting range 0, 1
• Set to “1” to enable advance angle compensation. (0: Advance angle compensation disabled; 1: Advance angle compensation enabled.)
• The factory setting is “0.”
Note This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON again.
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Various compensation value
enable/disable settings
Backlash compensation enable/disable
Advance angle compensation enable/disable
Present value
output setting
• If the advance angle compensation enable/disable function (Function No. H, Parameter No. 2) is displayed, the present settings will flash in the SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to set the data.
• Press the Set Key and the data will stop flashing for approximately one second, the setting will be confirmed, and the display will resume flashing.
3-6-7 Cam Protect
H Functions
• The cam protect function protects cams and banks from accidental changes or deletion of cam ON/
OFF data.
• Operations are limited in the following ways when data is cam protected.
Protected cam data cannot be changed or deleted.
Banks containing protected cam data cannot be deleted.
The P⋅CLR operation (clear all cam programs) cannot be performed.
If any of these operations are attempted, an E-22 (cam protect input prohibited) error will be displayed. (The program will not be changed or deleted.)
3-69
Operation
Chapter 3
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Cam Protect
Function
No.
C (c)
Parameter
No.
---
2
Setting range ---
• Use this parameter to set or release cam protection for individual banks and cams.
• The factory setting is “no cam protection for any cam.”
Note This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON again.
Cam Protect Display
• SPEED/ON
• POSITION/OFF
• The cam protect status for a particular cam number is shown by the ON/OFF status of the a 7-segment
indicator.
ON:
Cam protected
OFF: Not cam protected
Note The 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner does not have cam numbers 17 to 32. (Those
indicators will remain OFF).
3-70
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Set bank number
Set function number C
Change mode
Outline for Setting and Releasing Cam Protect
Change to SET mode (using the mode selection switch)
Cam protect
Set the cam protect function number
Use the Bank/Function Key to set function number C.
Press the Set Key (enabling bank number selection)
The Bank/Function display will start flashing.
”C” will appear in the leftmost Bank/Function digit.
Set the bank number to which cam protect is to be set or
cleared.
Use the Up and Down Keys to set the bank number.
The Bank/Function numeral will increase or decrease
as these keys are pressed.
Press the Set Key (enabling cam protect settings).
The cam number will appear in the Cam/Parameter No.
display.
Set or release cam protect.
There are two ways to set or release cam protect.
Set or release cam protect
• Setting/releasing by bank
Up + ON/OFF Switching Keys: Sets cam protect for all
cams in the bank.
Down + ON/OFF Switching Keys: Releases cam protect from all cams in the bank.
• Setting/releasing by cam
Use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number,
and then press one of the following.
Up Key: Sets cam protect for the specified cam.
Down Key: Releases cam protect for the specified cam.
Confirm settings
Once cam protect has been set/cleared for one bank,
press the Set Key and save the setting. “C” will flash
twice to confirm the settings have been saved.
The cam protect settings can be adjusted again if
required.
Press the Clear Key (enables bank number selection).
The Bank/Function display will flash.
The Cam/Parameter No. display will turn OFF.
If setting or clearing
cam protect for other
bank numbers.
Exit
Press the Bank/Function Key (enables function number
settings).
The operation to set or release cam protect has now
been completed.
3-71
Operation
Chapter 3
Setting/Releasing Cam Protect Procedure 1 (Enabling Cam Protect Settings)
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Bank number
selection possible
Cam protect
Cam protect (bank number 1)
Cam protect settings
possible
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
Cam protect (bank number 2)
Cam protect (bank number 2, cam number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 2, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160.
Cam protect (bank number 8)
Cam protect (bank number 8, cam number 1)
Up to bank number 4 for 720 resolution.
Cam protect (bank number 8, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
S Use the Bank/Function Key to set cam protect (Function No. C) and press the Set Key, and the
bank number will flash in the Bank/Function display (indicating that bank number selection is enabled.)
Use the Up and Down Keys to set the bank number containing the cam to be cam protected.
S Next, press the Set Key to display the cam number in the Cam/Parameter No. display. The current
cam protect status will be displayed in the SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF displays (and cam
protect settings can be made).
3-72
Operation
Chapter 3
Setting/Releasing Cam Protect Procedure 2 (Setting/Releasing Cam Protect within a Set Bank)
• Setting/Releasing Cam Protect by Bank
Set
Cam protect (bank number 1)
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Release
Bank number selection enabled
(Bank/Function display flashing)
Confirm settings
For 3F88L-162 (32-point model)
”C” flashes twice
Cam Positioners
Confirm settings
Cam protect settings possible
(present setting status displayed)
”C” flashes twice
S While the bank and cam numbers are displayed (cam protect settings enabled), press the ON/
OFF Switching Key while pressing the Up Key to set cam protect for all cams within that bank number.
S While the bank and cam numbers are displayed (cam protect settings enabled), press the ON/
OFF Switching Key while pressing the Down Key to release cam protect for all cams within that
bank number.
S Once cam protect has been set or released, press the Set Key to confirm the cam protect settings.
“C” will flash twice on the display. (Perform this operation for each bank. The setting will be canceled if the Set Key is not pressed before moving to another bank.)
S Once the settings have been completed, press the Clear Key to return to bank selection enabled
status (Bank/Function display flashing).
S To set or release cam protect for another bank number (the above operation), use the Up and
Down Keys when in bank selection enabled status (Bank/Function display flashing) to select the
new bank number, and repeat the above operation.
S Press the Bank/Function Key when in bank selection enabled status (Bank/Function display flashing) to return to function number setting status (”C” displayed in the Bank/Function display).
3-73
Operation
Chapter 3
• Setting/Releasing Cam Protect by Cam
Bank selection enabled status
(Bank/Function display flashing)
Cam protect (bank number 1)
Cam protect settings enabled status
(current setting status displayed)
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Release
Set
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 2)
Release
Set
Cam protect (bank number 1, cam number 3)
Release
Set
Confirm settings
“C” flashes twice
(This example shows cam protect set for cam numbers 1 to 9.)
S While the bank and cam numbers are being displayed (cam protect settings enabled status), press
the Cam/Parameter Key and set the cam number for which cam protect is to be set or released.
S Press the Up Key to set cam protect for that bank and cam number. (The relevant indicators will
turn ON.) Press the Down Key to release cam protect for that bank and cam number. (The relevant
indicators will turn OFF.)
S To set or release cam protect for another cam number, press the Cam/Parameter Key, change the
cam number, and repeat the above operation.
S Once cam protect has been set or released, press the Set Key to confirm the setting. “C” will flash
twice. (Perform this operation for each bank. The setting will be canceled if the Set Key is not
pressed before moving to another bank.)
S Once the settings have been completed, press the Clear Key to return to bank selection enabled
status (Bank/Function display flashing).
S To set or release cam protect for another bank number (the above operation), use the Up and
Down Keys when in bank selection enabled status (Bank/Function display flashing) to select the
new bank number, and repeat the above operation.
3-74
Operation
Chapter 3
S Press the Bank/Function Key when in bank selection enabled status (Bank/Function display flashing) to return to function number setting status (”C” displayed in the Bank/Function display).
3-6-8 One-direction Function
H Functions
• Enables cam outputs when the Resolver is rotating in one direction only, either forward or reverse. (If
the Resolver rotates in the opposite direction, the output status will be held.)
• This function can be set for any cam.
Note 1. The one-direction function is disabled when compensation operation, trial operation, or
teaching is being executed.
Note 2. When backlash compensation is enabled, the one-direction function works at the angle after
backlash compensation has been executed. (For example, even if the Resolver rotates in the
opposite direction, the system will not consider this as the reverse direction until the backlash
compensation amount has been exceeded.)
Note 3. When advance angle compensation is enabled, cam outputs are made at the angle after advance angle compensation has been made. Rotation direction for the one-direction function
is determined by the increasing or decreasing angles after backlash compensation has been
performed (the angle after advance angle compensation is not used to determine the rotation
direction). Therefore, even when the present angle is decreasing (when decelerating or due
to a reduction in the advance angle amount), this is not considered as reverse direction. (Refer to 3-6-6 Advance Angle Compensation.)
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D One-direction Function Setting
Function
No.
F (f)
Parameter
No.
---
2
Setting range 0 to 2
• Use this parameter to set or clear the one-direction function for each cam.
• The settings are as follows:
0: One-direction function disabled (factory setting)
1: Enabled in the forward direction (cam output status held when rotating in reverse)
2: Enabled in the reverse direction (cam output status held when rotating forward)
Note 1. This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then ON again.
Note 2. Use the CW/CCW setting switch to set either CW or CCW as the forward direction. Refer to
3-5-2 Initial Settings for details.
3-75
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Bank selection
enabled status
One-direction function setting
One-direction function (bank number 1)
One-direction function
setting enabled status
One-direction
function (bank
number 1, cam
number 1))
One-direction
function (bank
number 1, cam
number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
One-direction function (bank number 2)
One-direction
function (bank
number 2, cam
number 1))
One-direction
function (bank
number 2, cam
number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
One-direction function (bank number 8)
Up to bank number 4 for
720 resolution.
One-direction
function (bank
number 8, cam
number 1))
One-direction
function (bank
number 8, cam
number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
• Use the Bank/Function Key to set the one-direction function (Function No. F) and press the Set Key to
make the bank number flash in the Bank/Function display (bank selection enabled status). Use the Up
and Down Keys to set the bank number that contains the cam for which one-direction function is to be
set.
• Next, press the Set Key to display the cam number in the Cam/Parameter No. display. The present
settings will flash in the POSITION/OFF display (one-direction function setting enabled status).
• While the bank and cam numbers are displayed (one-direction function setting enabled status), press
the Cam/Parameter Key to change the cam number. Set the cam number for which the one-direction
function is to be set.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to set the data.
• Press the Set Key. The data will remain lit for approximately one second, the data will be confirmed,
and the display will start flashing again.
3-76
Operation
Chapter 3
H Operation Example
• Cam Program: Cam outputs ON between 100 and 200 (360 resolution)
• One-direction Setting: Enabled in the forward direction (cam output status held for rotation in
the opposite direction)
Rotation
direction
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Time
Resolver
angle
Time
Cam
outputs
Time
Cam output status held
Note If both the one-direction function and the advance angle compensation function are set at the
same time, cam outputs may be left out or output twice when the advance angle data is compensated. (Refer to 3-6-6 Advance Angle Compensation.)
3-6-9 Output Hold Function
H Functions
• The output hold function holds the cam output status when an error has been generated or when
switching from RUN mode to SET or PRGM mode.
• When the output hold function is enabled, the cam output status is held even in the following circumstances.
When banks are switched during operation.
When in PRGM or SET mode only when START signal is ON.
During origin shift processing.
When an error has been generated (except E-10 or watchdog errors).
• Even when the output hold function is enabled, cam outputs are OFF in the following circumstances.
When the START signal is OFF.
When the RESET signal is being input.
When a E-10 or watchdog error has been generated.
H Related Parameters
Function level
D Output Hold
Function
No.
• Settings:
H (h)
Parameter
No.
3
2
Setting range 0, 1
0: Output hold disabled (factory setting),
1: Output hold enabled
Note This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then ON again.
3-77
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Various compensation values
enable/disable setting
Backlash compensation enable/disable
Output hold
Present value
output setting
• When output hold (Function No. H, Parameter No. 3) is displayed, the present settings will flash in the
SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to set the data.
• Press the Set Key. The data will remain lit for approximately one second, the settings will be confirmed,
and then the data will resume flashing again.
3-6-10 Present Value Output Function
H Function
The present value output uses the cam output signal and output signals that are sent to the M7E or M7F
Display Units.
H Related Parameter (SET Mode)
Function level
D Present Value Output Setting
Function
No.
H (h)
Parameter
No.
4
2
Setting range 0 to 4
• Use this parameter to set the present value output function.
• The settings are as follows:
0: No present value output function (factory setting)
1: 4-digit present angle output (no units)
2: 4-digit speed output (no units)
3: 3-digit automatically switching present angle/speed output (with units)
4: 4-digit automatically switching present angle/speed output (with units)
For automatically switching data output, the present angle data will be output when the speed is less
than 4 r/min and the speed data will be output when the speed is 4 r/min or greater.
• Use settings 1 to 4 for M7E Display Units and 1 or 2 for M7F Display Units.
• The present value output signals are the same as cam output signals. When this function is used,
therefore, some cam outputs can no longer be used. (Different cam outputs are used for 3F88L-160
and 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners.)
Note 1. This parameter is enabled when the power is turned OFF and then ON again.
3-78
Operation
Chapter 3
Note 2. Use setting 2 or 4 when displaying speeds of 1,000 r/min or greater.
Setting
1
2
3
4
Display data
4-digit present angle
output (no units)
4-digit speed output
(no units)
3-digit automatically
switching present
angle/speed output
(with units)
4-digit automatically
switching present
angle/speed output
(with units)
Cams used for 3FF88L-160
CAM 13 to 16: Display data
Cams used for 3FF88L-162
CAM 29 to 32: Display data
CAM 12: 1st digit LE signal
CAM 28: 1st digit LE signal
CAM11: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM 27: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM10: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 26: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 9: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 25: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 13 to 16: Display data
CAM 29 to 32: Display data
CAM 12: 1st digit LE signal
CAM 28: 1st digit LE signal
CAM11: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM 27: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM10: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 26: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 9: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 25: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 13 to 16: Display data
CAM 29 to 32: Display data
CAM 12: 1st digit LE signal
CAM 28: 1st digit LE signal
CAM11: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM 27: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM10: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 26: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 9: “Degrees” units output
CAM 25: “Degrees” units output
CAM 8: “r/min” units output
CAM 24: “r/min” units output
CAM 13 to 16: Display data
CAM 29 to 32: Display data
CAM 12: 1st digit LE signal
CAM 28: 1st digit LE signal
CAM11: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM 27: 2nd digit LE signal
CAM10: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 26: 3rd digit LE signal
CAM 9: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 25: 4th digit LE signal
CAM 8: “Degrees” units output
CAM 24: “Degrees” units output
CAM 7: “r/min” units output
CAM 23: “r/min” units output
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Various compensation value
enable/disable setting
Backlash compensation enable/disable
Output hold
Present value
output setting
• Display the present value output setting (Function No. H, Parameter No. 4) and the present settings
will flash in the SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to set the data.
3-79
Operation
Chapter 3
• Press the Set Key. The data will remain lit for approximately one second, the settings will be confirmed,
and then the data will resume flashing again.
H Data Output Timing
• 3F88L-160 (16-point Model)
• For Present Value Outputs Set to “2” (4-digit Resolver Speed (No Units))
1st digit display
2nd digit display
3rd digit display
4th digit display
1st digit
Output Tr:ON
Output Tr:OFF
Time
Time
Output Tr:ON
Output Tr:OFF
Time
Output Tr:ON
Output Tr:OFF
Output Tr:ON
Output Tr:OFF
Time
Time
Note The output timing for each digit of display data (CAM 13 to 16) and each digit’s LE signal (CAM9 to
12) are shown below.
1st digit display data
3-6-11 Pulse Output Function
H Function
• The pulse output function creates cam programs that turn ON and OFF at even intervals at particular
bank and cam numbers.
• The cam programs that turn ON/OFF at even intervals can be set from any angle (pulse start position).
Note 1. For pulse settings to be made, the resolution/(pulse number × 2) must be an integer. If this
equation does not produce an integer, the pulse number will be changed to the nearest pulse
number that will give an integer. The pulse numbers are as follows:
For 360 resolution:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 30, 36, 45, 60, 90, 180
For 720 resolution:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 24, 30, 36, 40, 45, 60, 72, 90, 120,
180, 360
If a pulse that falls between any of these pulse numbers is set, it will be converted to the next
largest pulse number. For example, if “7” is set for 720 resolution, it will be converted to “8.”
Note 2. If the pulse number and pulse start position are set, a cam program that turns ON at the pulse
start position will be created.
3-80
Operation
Chapter 3
Note 3. Cam programs created using the pulse output function, like other cam programs, can be
edited and deleted in PRGM mode and edited freely using compensation and trial operations.
Note 4. The pulse output function creates cam programs and does not store the parameters set here
in memory.
Note 5. Refer to 3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking for information on how to check cam programs that have been created using this function.
Note 6. If the pulse output function is used to create a new cam program for a cam number that already has a cam program input, the existing cam program does not have to be cleared beforehand. When pulse output settings are made, all existing cam programs are cleared and overwritten by the pulse output cam program.
H Operation Example
• For Pulse Number = 4, Pulse Start Position = 30°
Cam output (cam program)
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Pulse Output Setting
Function
No.
P (p)
Parameter
No.
---
2
Setting range ---
• Use this parameter to create pulse output programs.
3-81
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Pulse number
selection enabled
Pulse output setting
Pulse output (bank number 1)
Pulse output setting
enabled
Pulse output (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 1, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
Pulse output (bank number 2)
Pulse output (bank number 2, cam number 1)
Pulse output (bank number 2, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
Pulse output (bank number 8)
Pulse output (bank number 8, cam number 1)
Up to bank number 4 for
720 resolution
Pulse output (bank number 8, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for 3F88L-160.
• Use the Bank/Function Key to make the pulse output settings (Function No. P) and press the Set Key
and the bank number will flash in the Bank/Function display. Use the Up and Down Keys to set the
bank number that contains the cam for which a pulse output program is to be created.
• Next, press the Set Key to display the cam number in the Cam/Parameter No. display. Alternatively,
“P-- -- --” (first digit flashing) will appear in the SPEED/ON display and “-- -- --” will appear in the POSITION/OFF display.
• Press the Cam/Parameter Key until the cam number to be set appears.
• The data that appears in the SPEED/ON display is the pulse number. Set a pulse number between 1
and 180 for 360 resolution or between 1 and 360 for 720 resolution.
• The data that appears in the POSITION/OFF display is the pulse start position. Set a pulse start position between 0 and 359 (for 360 resolution) and 0 and 719 (for 720 resolution).
• Use the Forward, Up, and Down Keys to set the data. Use the ON/OFF Switching Key to switch between pulse number and pulse start position data.
3-82
Operation
Chapter 3
• Press the Set Key. The data will remain lit for approximately one second, the settings will be confirmed,
and then the data will resume flashing again.
• If the data is inappropriate and the Set Key is pressed, all displays will flash twice and then return to the
settings before the data was edited. Re-input the correct data.
3-6-12 Teaching
H Function
• The teaching function is used to input data from the Resolver as ON/OFF angle settings while the machinery is being manually operated.
• The only editing of cam programs allowed while using this function is the registration or deletion of
ON/OFF angle data.
Note 1. If the teaching function is used on cam numbers for which a cam program has already been
input, steps will be added to that cam program.
Note 2. The ON or OFF angles for cam programs that have been already input cannot be changed
separately.
Note 3. The teaching function cannot be used if the Resolver speed is 4 r/min or greater.
H Related Parameter (SET Mode)
Function level
D Teaching
Function
No.
d (d)
Parameter
No.
---
2
Setting range ---
• Use this parameter to create cam programs.
3-83
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Bank number
selection enabled
Teaching
Teaching (bank number 1)
Input by teaching and
step deletion enabled
Teaching (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 1, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160.
Teaching (bank number 2)
Teaching (bank number 2, cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 2, cam number 32)
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160.
Teaching (bank number 8)
Teaching (bank number 8, cam number 1)
Teaching (bank number 8, cam number 32)
Up to bank number 4 for 720
resolution
Up to cam number 16 for
3F88L-160.
• Use the Bank/Function Key to set teaching (Function No. d) and press the Set Key to display the bank
number in the Bank/Function display (flashing). Use the Up and Down Keys to set the bank number
that contains the cam to which the teaching function will be applied.
• Next, press the Set Key to display the cam number in the Cam/Parameter No. display.
If there is no cam program for that cam number
The SPEED/ON display will be “-- -- --” and the POSITION/OFF display will be “-- -- --.”
If there is a cam program for that cam number
The ON and OFF angles for step 1 will be displayed.
Press the Set Key to display the ON and OFF angles for step 2.
Press the Set Key while the last step is displayed. The displays will be “-- -- --” and “-- -- --.”
• Press the Cam/Parameter Key until the cam number to be set is displayed.
3-84
Operation
Chapter 3
D Input Using the Teaching Function
Operation
Display
Explanation
Change the status to display the cam number to which the teaching
function is to be applied.
Press the the Set Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key.
ON/
OFF
+
SET
The ON angle can now be input.
The present angle will be flashing in the SPEED/ON display.
(Manual
operation of
machinery)
Using manual operation, move the machine to the ON angle position.
Press the Set Key to set the ON angle and change the status to
enable OFF angle input.
Note Press the Clear Key to re-set the ON angle. The system will return
to the ON angle input status.
SET
(Manual
operation of
machinery)
Using manual operation, move the machine to the OFF angle position.
Press the Set Key to set the OFF angle.
The ON and OFF angles for the step created using the teaching
function will be displayed in the SPEED/ON and POSITION/OFF
displays.
SET
ON/
OFF
+
SET
To apply the teaching function to the next step in the same cam
number, press the Set Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key
again.
Repeat the same operation as described above.
Note If the ON or OFF setting overlaps with the ON region for the next step when the Set Key is pressed
to save those settings, an E23 (cam program duplication error) will be generated. Press the Clear
Key if this error occurs. The error will be cleared and the status will return to the angle settings that
generated the error.
If an E23 (cam program duplication error) occurs, check the contents of the already input cam
program. Refer to Deleting Cam Program Steps on the next page for information on how to delete
the relevant step.
3-85
Operation
Chapter 3
D Changes in Display after Teaching Inputs
Teaching (bank number 1, cam number 1)
ON angle input status
OFF angle input status
D Deleting Cam Program Steps
• Perform the following operation to delete steps in an existing cam program for a particular cam number.
Teaching (bank number 1, cam number 1)
Step data ready to be deleted
Deleting step data
• Display the step to be deleted. (Press the Set Key to display the steps in order.)
• Press the the Clear Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key. The ON and OFF angles will flash
(indicating that the step data is ready to be deleted.)
• Press the Set Key to delete the data. The displays will change to “-- -- --” and “-- -- --.”
• If the Clear Key is pressed when the step data is ready to be deleted, the delete operation will be canceled, and the display will return to the original display.
Note The “-- -- --” and “-- -- --” displayed after the step has been deleted indicate the next status after the
last step. Therefore, press the Set Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key to display the
ON and OFF angles for step 1.
Relationship between Teaching and Various Compensation Functions
S If the teaching function is used while other compensation functions are set, the present angle as
adjusted by the compensation function will be read as ON angle or OFF angle data.
S When using compensation functions, perform teaching after these functions have been changed
to the “enabled” status.
3-86
Origin compensation (origin shift):
Refer to 3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift.
Backlash compensation:
Refer to 3-6-5 Backlash Compensation.
Advance angle compensation:
Refer to 3-6-6 Advance Angle Compensation.
Operation
Chapter 3
One-direction function setting:
Not related to the teaching function.
These settings will become enabled after the power has been turned OFF and then ON again.
Therefore, always turn OFF the power once before starting the teaching operation.
Teaching and Backlash Compensation
Backlash compensation operates when the Resolver rotates in the reverse direction. In other
words, the present angle does not change until the Resolver rotating in the reverse direction has
turned the amount for the backlash compensation. When using the teaching function, therefore,
the machine must be manually operated to rotate the Resolver axis. For example, when the
Resolver is connected to the drive axle that is driven by a motor and if there is backlash between
the drive axle and the driven side (load side), teaching must be performed by moving the drive
axle. If the driven side is moved for teaching, the backlash compensation will work in the opposite
direction and teaching will not be performed correctly.
Correct
Incorrect
Driven side
Driven side
Drive axle
Resolver
Drive axle
Resolver
(Drive axle moved and teaching performed)
(Driven side moved and teaching performed)
For example, in the right-hand example, even if the driven side is moved to the right for the
amount of the backlash compensation, the Resolver will not rotate, and therefore, the present
angle will not change. Even if the driven side is moved to the left for the amount of the backlash
compensation, the backlash compensation function will work and the present angle will not
change.
Teaching and Advance Angle Compensation
Advance angle compensation is performed when the Resolver is rotating. Teaching, in principle,
is performed while the Resolver is stationary. Advance angle compensation, therefore, generally
does not affect the teaching function. However, advance angle compensation does affect the
teaching function for teaching that can be executed only when the Resolver is rotating (at less
than 4 r/min). In particular, if a large advance angle compensation is set at low speed, the present
angle may not be continuous in the region where the advance angle is compensated, and the
angle to which the teaching function has been applied will become inappropriate.
When using the advance angle function, therefore, pay attention to the following points when
using the teaching function also.
S Perform teaching while the Resolver is not rotating.
S When the Resolver cannot be stopped, keep the advance angle amount as small as possible
for rotation at low speed (less than 4 r/min).
S When the Resolver cannot be stopped, perform teaching when there is no acceleration (when
the speed is constant.)
Furthermore, when teaching has been completed, change the advance angle compensation
position (advance angle compensation value 3) to a section where the cam output does not
change (the middle of a section where the ON or OFF status continues for a long time.)
3-87
Operation
Chapter 3
3-6-13 Copy Function (Data Transfer)
H Function
• The copy function receives and transmits data (cam programs and parameters) between two Cam
Positioners.
• By setting one Cam Positioner as the Master and one as the Slave, data can be read, written, and
verified.
• Cam Positioners are connected via communications ports by RS-232C cables.
H Connecting RS-232C Cables
D Connecting Cam Positioners
RS-232C cables are connected via the Cam Positioner communications ports.
Communications
port
RS-232C cable
Communications
port
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
D Communications Port Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
Symbol
1
NC
2
RD
3
SD
Signal name
--Receive data
Send data
Pin No.
Symbol
6
NC
7
RS
8
CS
4
5
--Signal
ground
9
Shell
NC
SG
NC
FG
Signal name
--Send request
Send
enabled
--Frame
ground
D RS-232C Cable Assembly
An RS-232C cross cable is used for communications between Cam Positioners (9-pin D-sub, socket -socket type)
9-pin
3-88
Shell
Shield
Shell
9-pin
Operation
Chapter 3
Recommended Products
Name
RS-232C
Connector
Cable
Model (manufacturer)
No. of
Units
XM2D-0901 (OMRON)
2
XM2S-0913 (OMRON)
Non-UL
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB (Fujikura Ltd.)
product
d
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG (Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.)
UL product UL2464 AWG28×5P IFS-RVV-SB (Fujikura
Ltd.)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P×28AWG (Hitachi
Cable, Ltd.)
2
1
Description
9-pin D-sub connector
(socket)
Connector hood
Shielded multi-cond
ductor
cable
bl
Note Keep the RS-232C cable under 5 m.
H Outline of Data Transfer Operation
The basic operation when transferring data (cam programs and parameters) between two Cam Positioner Units is outlined below.
1. Connect the RS-232C Cable.
Connect the cable according to the instructions under Connecting RS-232C Cables in the previous
section.
2. Set the baud rate.
Set the baud rate (Function No. b, Parameter No. 6). Set the same baud rate for both Master and
Slave Units.
1: 9,600 bps (factory setting)
2: 19,200 bps
3. Turn OFF the power supply and turn it ON again.
If the baud rate setting has been changed, turn OFF the power supply and turn it ON again. This will
enable the baud rate setting.
4. Put the Slave Unit into transmission enabled mode.
Display Function No. t, Parameter No. 0 on the Slave Cam Positioner Unit.
5. Put the Master Unit into transmission enabled mode.
Display Function No. t, Parameter No. 1 on the Master Cam Positioner Unit. Set the data as required
for the transmission and press the Set Key. The data transfer will begin.
1: Data read (Reads programs and parameters from the Slave to the Master.)
2: Data write (Writes programs and parameters from the Master to the Slave.)
3: Data verification (Verifies the Master programs and parameters against the Slave programs and
parameters.)
3-89
Operation
Chapter 3
H Related Parameters (SET Mode)
Function level
D Baud Rate Setting
Function
No.
b (b)
Parameter
No.
6
2
Setting range 1, 2
• The Baud rate setting function sets the baud rate for data transmission.
• The baud rate settings are explained below.
1: 9,600 bps (factory setting)
2: 19,200 bps
• Set the same baud rate for both the Master and Slave Units.
Note This parameter is enabled after the power has been turned OFF and then ON again.
Operation
Use the mode selection switch to change to SET mode.
Origin
compensation
value
Backlash compensation value
Baud rate
• When the baud rate (Function No. b, Parameter No. 6) is displayed, the present baud rate settings
flash in the SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to change the data.
• Press the Set Key and the data will remain lit for approximately one second, the setting will be confirmed, and the display will resume flashing.
• If the baud rate setting has been changed, turn OFF the power supply and turn it ON again.
Function level
D Data Transfer (Slave Unit Settings)
Function
No.
t (t)
Parameter
No.
0
1
2
1
2
Setting range ---
• Use this parameter to make the settings on the Slave Unit to enable data transfer.
D Data Transfer (Master Unit Settings)
Function
No.
t (t)
Parameter
No.
1
Function level
Setting range 0 to 3
• Use this parameter to make the settings on the Master Unit to enable data transfer.
• The settings are shown below.
0: Disabled (factory setting)
1: Data read (Reads cam programs and parameters from the Slave to the Master Unit.)
2: Data write (Writes cam programs and parameters from the Master to the Slave Unit.)
3: Data verification (Verifies the Master programs and parameters against the Slave programs and
parameters.)
3-90
Operation
Chapter 3
Operation
Data transfer
Data transfer (Slave Unit settings)
Data transfer (Master Unit settings)
D Slave Cam Positioner Settings
• Use the Bank/Function Key to set data transfer (Function No. t) and press the Set Key. “0” (Slave Unit
settings) will appear in the Cam/Parameter No. display.
• The settings for the Slave Unit have now been completed. While this data is displayed, make the settings for the Master Cam Positioner Unit.
D Master Cam Positioner Settings
• Use the Bank/Function Key to set data transfer (Function No. t) and press the Set Key. “0” (Slave Unit
settings) will appear in the Cam/Parameter No. display.
• Press the Cam/Parameter Key to display “1” (Master Unit settings)
• ”0” will flash in the SPEED/ON display.
• Use the Up and Down Keys to set the data.
0: Disabled (factory setting)
1: Data read (Reads cam programs and parameters from the Slave to the Master Unit.)
2: Data write (Writes cam programs and parameters from the Master to the Slave Unit.)
3: Data verification (Verifies the Master programs and parameters against the Slave programs and
parameters.)
• If the incorrect setting is made, e.g., if data read (setting “1”) and data write (setting “2”) settings are
mistaken, important data may be deleted. Check again that the correct setting has been selected.
• Press the Set Key to start communications with the Slave Cam Positioner Unit. During the transfer, the
data being transferred (P: parameter; b1 to b8: bank numbers 1 to 8) will be appear in the POSITION/
OFF display. The communications will take approximately 40 seconds to be completed.
Note 1. The data being transferred will be displayed on the Master Unit only.
Note 2. The display will not include “b5” to “b8” for 720 resolution.
• When the communications have been completed normally, press the Set Key to return to the previous
display.
• If a communications error has occurred, the error code will appear in the SPEED/ON display. Check
the error and press the Clear Key. The error will be cleared. Press the Set Key to return to the previous
display.
Additional Information on the Copy Function
S Data Transferred
All cam programs and parameters will be transferred from one Cam Positioner Unit to the other.
The contents of Function No. t (data transfer) and Function No. P (pulse output setting) will not be
transferred.
3-91
Operation
Chapter 3
S Data Transfer between Different Cam Positioner Models
When data is transferred between 3F88L-160 and 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner Units, cam programs for cam numbers 17 to 32 will be transferred. However, if these programs have been
transferred to 3F88L-160 Cam Positioner Units, they cannot be displayed or checked. If data is
transferred to a 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner from a 3F88L-160 Cam Positioner that has cam programs for cam numbers 17 to 32, these cam programs can be checked on the 3F88L-162 Cam
Positioner side.
S Operation after Data Transfer
Once the data transfer has been completed, turn OFF the power for the Cam Positioner that received the data transfer and then turn it ON again. The parameters will be enabled when the
power is turned ON again.
The power must be turned OFF and then ON again to determine if the data has been correctly
transferred.
S Communications Errors
The following communications errors may occur.
E-22 (Cam Protect Error)
This cam protect error will occur on the receiving side if there is a cam that has been cam protected in that Cam Positioner. The parameters will be transferred but the cam program will terminate with an error. Clear all cam protects on the receiving Cam Positioner and then re-transfer
the data. (Refer to 3-6-7 Cam Protect.)
If the Cam Positioner transmitting the data is a Master Unit, an E-31 (communications error) will
be generated in the Master Unit.
E-31 (Communications Error)
This communications error is generated in the Master Unit when there has been no response
from the Slave Unit or when there has been a communications data error in the Slave Unit. If this
error occurs while data is transferred, transfer of some parameters or partial cam programs may
result.
Press the Clear Key to delete the error.
This error will not occur in the Slave Unit.
E-33 (Verification Error)
This verification error is generated when the cam programs or parameters on the Master Unit do
not match those on the Slave Unit.
Press the Clear Key to delete the error.
This error will not occur in the Slave Unit.
3-92
Operation
Chapter 3
3-6-14 Trial/Adjustment Operation
The trial/adjustment operation function is used to adjust ON and OFF angles while
checking the cam output status. This function is made up of the trial operation function
and the adjustment operation function. The differences between these two functions is
outlined below.
Trial operation function: This function is operated in PRGM mode. Regardless of the
status of the START input, control and cam outputs are made and the Up and Down
Keys are used to change the ON and OFF angles of any cam number in any bank number. (The angles can be changed in units of “1.”)
Adjustment operation function: This function is executed in RUN mode when the
START input is ON. If the current bank number is being operated, the ON and OFF
angles of any cam number within that bank number can be changed by using the Up and
Down Keys. (The angles can be changed in units of “1.”)
Normally, the trial operation function is used to check the contents of cam programs
when the system is started up and the adjustment operation is used to change angles
after the system has started operation. The data changes made using the trial operation
and adjustment operation functions are reflected in the outputs at the point the data is
changed using the Up and Down Keys.
H Trial Operation (PRGM Mode)
D Outline of Operation
1. Use the mode selection switch to change to PRGM mode.
2. Use the Bank/Function Key to set the bank number containing the cam that is to be adjusted.
3. Press the Set Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key to enable the trial operation function.
4. Use the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number to be adjusted.
5. Adjust the ON angle (using the Up and Down Keys)
6. Adjust the OFF angle (by pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key and then using the Up and Down
Keys)
7. Press the Set Key to display the next step.
8. The message “Do you want to adjust the next step?” will appear.
Select “Y” to return to 5 above. Select “N” to continue.
9. The message “Do you want to adjust another cam number?” will appear.
Select “Y” to return to 4 above. Select “N” to continue.
10. Press the Clear Key to exit the trial operation function.
11. The message “Do you want to adjust another bank number?” will appear.
Select “Y” to return to 2 above. Select “N” to exit the procedure.
3-93
Operation
Chapter 3
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
Use the mode selection switch to change to PRGM mode.
Use the Bank/Function Key to display the bank number for the trial
operation.
BANK/
FUN
Press the Set Key while pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key
ON/
OFF
+
SET
The trial operation function is now enabled.
Note 1. Press the Clear Key at this stage to return to the previous status.
2. From this point, cam outputs corresponding to the Resolver
angle will be output.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key.
Note
CAM/
PRMTR
CAM/
PRMTR
The cam number will appear in the Cam/Parameter No. display.
The ON angle for step 1 will appear (flashing) in the SPEED/ON
display. The OFF angle for step 1 will appear (lit) in the
POSITION/OFF display.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key to set the cam number for which angle
data is to be adjusted.
The ON and OFF angles for step 1 will be displayed (ON angle
flashing, OFF angle lit)
Press the Up and Down Keys to increase or decrease the ON angle.
The ON angle for cam outputs will be changed at the same time.
Note The Up and Down Keys will not work if the ON section overlaps
another step.
ON/
OFF
SET
Press the ON/OFF Switching Key to make the OFF angle flash. Use
the Up and Down Keys to increase and decrease the OFF angle. (The
cam output OFF angles will be changed at the same time.)
Note The Up and Down Keys will not work if the ON section overlaps
another step.
Press the Set Key to display step 2.
Repeat the same procedure to adjust the ON and OFF angles for step
2 onwards.
Note 1. The display will not move on to step 2 if there is only one step.
2. During trial operation, the data changes will be reflected in the
outputs and cam program at the point the changes are made.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key to adjust other cam numbers.
Note
CAM/
PRMTR
CLR
3-94
Step 1 of the next cam number will be displayed.
Repeat the same procedure to adjust the angles for each step.
Press the Clear Key to exit the trial operation function.
Note To adjust the cams in another bank number, exit the trial operation,
press the Bank/Function Key to set the next bank number to be adjusted, and re-enter trial operation mode.
Operation
Chapter 3
H Adjustment Operation (RUN Mode)
D Outline of Operation
1. Change to RUN mode.
2. Press the Set Key while press the Up and Down Keys to enable the adjustment operation function.
3. Use the Up and Down Keys to set the cam number to be adjusted.
4. Press the Set Key.
5. Adjust the ON angle using the Up and Down Keys.
6. Adjust the OFF angle by pressing the ON/OFF Switching Key and then using the Up and Down
Keys).
7. Press the Set Key to display the next step.
8. The message “Do you want to adjust the next step?” will appear.
Select “Y” to return to 5 above. Select “N” to continue.
9. Press the Cam/Parameter Key.
10. The message “Do you want to adjust another cam number?” will appear.
Select “Y” to return to 3 above. Select “N” to continue.
11. Press any key other than the Up, Down, or Set Keys to exit the procedure.
D Procedure
Operation
Display
Explanation
(Display during normal RUN mode.)
Press the Set Key while pressing the Up or Down Keys.
The adjustment operation function will now be enabled.
+
+
SET
The cam number will be displayed (flashing) in the Cam/Parameter
No. display.
Note Press any key other than the Up, Down, or Set Keys at this point to
return to the previous status.
Use the Up and Down Keys to set the cam number for which angle
data is to be adjusted.
Press the Set Key.
SET
The angles for step 1 will be displayed (ON angle flashing and OFF
angle lit).
Press the Up and Down Keys to increase or decrease the ON angle.
The cam output ON angle will change at the same time.
Note The Up and Down Keys will not work if the ON section overlaps
another step.
ON/
OFF
Press the ON/OFF Switching Key to make the OFF angle flash. Use
the Up and Down Keys to increase and decrease the OFF angle. (The
cam output OFF angles will be changed at the same time.)
Note The Up and Down Keys will not work if the ON section overlaps
another step.
3-95
Operation
Operation
Chapter 3
Display
Explanation
Press the Set Key to save the adjusted angle data and display step 2.
Use the same procedure to adjust the ON and OFF angles for step 2
onwards.
Note 1. The display will not move on to step 2 if there is only one step.
SET
2. During adjustment operation, the data changes will be reflected in the outputs and cam program at the point the
changes are made.
Press the Cam/Parameter Key to adjust other cam numbers.
Note
The display will return to a flashing cam number.
Repeat the same operation to adjust the angles for each step in other
cam numbers.
CAM/
PRMTR
SET
Other Keys
3-96
Use the Up and Down Keys to set the cam number, use the Set Key to
display the ON and OFF angle data, use the Up and Down Keys to
adjust the ON angle data, use the ON/OFF Switching Key to make the
OFF angle flash, use the Up and Down Keys to adjust the OFF angle,
and use the Set Key to save the adjusted data. Repeat this operation
as required.)
To exit the adjustment operation function, press any key other than the
Up, Down, or Set Keys while the cam number is flashing.
The display will exit the adjustment operation function and return to
normal RUN mode.
4
Chapter 4
Communications
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Overview of CompoWay/F Communications
Command and Response Frames
Command Types
Executing CompoWay/F Commands with
Protocol Macros
Communications
4-1
Chapter 4
Overview of CompoWay/F Communications
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner has a communications port that conforms to CompoWay/F Type B. Through communications, the 3F88L-160/162 is capable of reading
and writing cam programs and parameters as well as monitoring the present cam angle
and Resolver speed.
Note CompoWay/F is OMRON’s standard protocol for serial communications. It provides a standard
frame format and commands based on the Factory Interface Network Service (FINS) used by
OMRON Programmable Controllers in order to facilitate communications between components
or between a personal computer and a component.
Note FINS is a protocol used for message communications between controllers on OMRON FA networks.
H Cam Positioner Communications
In communications between a Cam Positioner and a host CPU, communications capabilities differ depending on the operating mode of the Cam Positioner.
Mode
RUN
PRGM
SET
RUN
Function
Read
Monitor
Operating
State Change
4-2
Data
Error code
Executing status
Model and communications buffer size
Communications capabilities
Reads error code.
Reads Cam Positioner status.
Reads model and communications
buffer size (send or receive buffer size,
whichever smaller).
Internode Echo test Conducts an internode echo test.
Command name
Controller Status
R d
Read
Unit Attribute
Read
Internode Echo
Test
Controller Data
Read
Memoryy Area
R d
Read
Model and version
Reads model and version.
Resolver speed
Present cam angle
Cam output status
Executing bank
Control I/O status
---
Reads Resolver speed.
Reads present cam angle.
Reads cam output status.
Reads the bank being executed.
Reads control I/O status.
Changes the current operating state to Operation Comthe one in which parameters and pro- mand
grams can be sent and received in
RUN mode.
Returns from the above state to the
original state.
Communications
Mode
SET
((Slave
Unit setting)
Function
Read/Write
Program
Clear
Parameter
Clear
Parameter
Update
Chapter 4
Data
Resolution/compensation settings
Compensation values
Cam data protect
settings
Output hold information
Cam program
---
Communications capabilities
Reads and writes operation parameters.
Reads and writes compensation value
parameters.
Reads and writes cam data protect
settings.
Reads and writes output hold information.
Reads and writes cam programs.
Clears cam programs.
---
Returns parameters to their default
settings.
Enables parameters that will be made
valid when the power is turned OFF
and then ON. (Using this command
makes it unnecessary to turn the power OFF and then ON when making parameter settings valid.)
---
Command name
Parameter Area
Read/Write
/
H Connecting to Host CPU
Connect the Cam Positioner to the host CPU through the communications port.
RS-232C cable
Communications
port
Host CPU (such as personal
computers and CS1-series
Programmable Controllers)
3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner
H Communications Specifications
The communications specifications of the Cam Positioner are shown below. Set the communications
conditions of the host CPU to these specifications.
Communications method: RS-232C
Synchronization method: Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate:
9,600 or 19,200 bps (parameter setting)
Transmission code:
ASCII
Data bit length:
7 bits
Stop bit:
2 bits
Parity:
Even
Node number:
“00”
Subaddress:
“00”
Note 1. The Cam Positioner is factory-set to a baud rate of 9,600 bps. To use 19,200 bps, relevant
parameters must be set. Refer to 3-6-13 Copy Function (Data Transfer) for details.
4-3
Communications
Chapter 4
Note 2. Node numbers and subaddresses are the codes used when executing commands. In this
chapter, numeric values enclosed in double quotation marks such as “00” represent ASCII
codes. Numeric values followed by Hex such as (02 Hex) represent hexadecimal values. For
example, ASCII code “00” can be represented as (30 30 Hex) in hexadecimal notation.
H Communications Cables (RS-232C Cables)
D Communications Port Pin Arrangement on Cam Positioner End
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
Symbol
NC
RD
SD
NC
SG
Signal name
--Receive data
Send data
--Signal ground
Pin No.
6
7
8
9
Shell
Symbol
NC
RS
CS
NC
FG
Signal name
--Request to send
Clear to send
--Frame ground
D Assembling RS-232C Cables
The cable length must be 5 m or less.
Host CPU end
Cam Positioner end
D-sub 9-pin socket:
OMRON XM2D-0901
Shell
Connector hood:
OMRON XM2S-0913
Shell
Shield
9-pin
Recommended Cables
Name
Cable
Model (manufacturer)
Non-UL
AWG28¢5P IFVV-SB (Fujikura Ltd.)
product
d
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P¢28AWG (Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
UL product
p
UL2464 AWG28¢5P IFS-RVV-SB (Fujikura Ltd.)
UL2464-SB(MA) 5P¢28AWG (Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
Quantity
Remarks
1
Shielded multiconductor
d
cable
Note The following cables can be used to connect to CS1-series Programmable Controllers.
Name
Programming Device
Connecting Cables (for
RS-232C port)
4-4
Model (manufactured
by OMRON)
XW2Z-200S-CV
Length
2m
XW2Z-500S-CV
5m
Quantity
1
Remarks
For connection to
CS1 series PCs
CS1-series
Communications
4-2
Chapter 4
Command and Response Frames
4-2-1 Command Frame
H Transmission Protocol
When receiving a command from the host CPU, the Cam Positioner returns a response frame corresponding to the command. In other words, one response frame is returned in response to one command
frame.
Command and response frames are transmitted as shown in the following illustration.
Host CPU
(personal computer,
PC, etc.)
Command frame
Command frame
3F88L-160/162
Cam Positioner
Response frame
H Command Frame Structure
Text
STX Node No. Subaddress SID FINS-mini command text (PDU)
(02
Hex) “0”
No. of bytes
1
STX
Node No.
Subaddress
SID (service ID)
FINS-mini command text
ETX
BCC
(block check character)
“0”
2
“0”
“0”
2
(Refer to 4-3 Command Types.)
1
ETX BCC
(03
Hex)
1
1
A code signifying the beginning of a communications frame (text). Always
set 02 Hex.
The node number of a Cam Positioner. Always set “00.”
The subaddress of a Cam Positioner. Always set “00.”
Set the number of retries using a value from “0” to “F.” (See note 1.)
Set a service request PDU (protocol data unit). (See note 2.)
A code signifying the end of text. Always set 03 Hex.
Set BCC as the calculation result of exclusive OR of the data from the node
number to ETX.
4-5
Communications
Chapter 4
Note 1. Operations on the Cam Positioner side are shown below.
Receives command frame
Errors other than
end code “0F”
Checks command frame
Y
SID (no. of retries) = “0”?
Sends error response
Saves the following information on
current command frame.
N
S MRC/SRC (command code)
Same as the contents of last
command?
S BCC excluding SID
N
S MRC/SRC (command code)
Analyzes command and sends
response
S BCC excluding SID
Y
Sends the last response frame
Waits for next command frame
When initially sending a command frame, set SID to “0.” If the corresponding response frame is
abnormal, set SID to “1” and then resend the command frame.
Note 2. Refer to 4-3 Command Types for details on FINS-mini command text.
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
FINS-mini command text consists of MRC, SRC, and data.
No. of bytes
MRC
SRC
2
2
Data
Main request code and subrequest code. Various commands can be set by
combining these two codes.
Settings differ depending on the command executed. Refer to 4-3 Command
Types for details.
MRC, SRC
Data
D Contents of MRC and SRC
MRC
“01”
“02”
“05”
“06”
“08”
“30”
4-6
SRC
“01”
“01”
“02”
“01”
“03”
“01”
“01”
“05”
Function
Memory Area Read
Parameter Area Read
Parameter Area Write
Controller Data Read
Unit Attribute Read
Controller Status Read
Operation Command
Internode Echo Test
Reference section
4-3-1
4-3-2
4-3-2
4-3-3
4-3-4
4-3-5
4-3-6
4-3-7
Communications
Chapter 4
4-2-2 Response Frame
H Response Frame Structure
D When Command Frame is Normal
No. of bytes
STX
Node No. Subaddress End code FINS-mini response text (PDU) ETX BCC
(02
Hex)
“0”
1
“0”
“0”
2
“0”
“0”
2
(03
Hex)
“0”
2
1
1
A code signifying the beginning of a communications frame (text). 02 Hex is
set.
The node number of a Cam Positioner. “00” is set.
The subaddress of a Cam Positioner. “00” is set.
“00” is set at normal termination.
A response PDU (protocol data unit) is set.
A code signifying the end of text. 03 Hex is set.
BCC is set as the calculation result of exclusive OR of the data from the
node number to ETX.
STX
Node No.
Subaddress
End code
FINS-mini response text
ETX
BCC
(block check character)
D When FINS-mini Command is Not Executed
No. of bytes
End code
STX
Node No. Subaddress End code FINS-mini response text (PDU) ETX BCC
(02
Hex)
“0”
1
“0”
“0”
2
“0”
“0”
2
(03
Hex)
“F”
2
1
1
“0F” is set when the specified FINS-mini command is not executed. Details
on non-execution can be checked with FINS response code.
D When Command Frame is Abnormal
No. of bytes
End code
STX
Node No. Subaddress End code ETX BCC
(02
Hex)
“0”
1
“0”
2
“0”
(03
Hex)
“0”
2
2
1
1
End code differs with the type of error.
4-7
Communications
Chapter 4
D Error Code and Error Detection Priority
Error
code
Name
Meaning
“00”
“0F”
Normal completion
FINS command error
“10”
Parity error
“11”
“12”
Framing error
Overrun error
“13”
“14”
“16”
“18”
BCC error
Format error
Subaddress error
Frame length error
The command terminated normally.
The specified FINS-mini command failed to be
executed.
A parity error occurred in any of the received
characters.
A framing error occurred in the received frame.
An overrun error occurred in any of the received
characters.
BCC in the received frame is invalid.
The FINS frame is invalid.
The subaddress in the received frame is invalid.
The received frame exceeded the maximum
number of bytes supported.
Error
detection
priority
(None)
8
2
1
3
5
7
6
4
Note 1. The Cam Positioner does not respond until ETX and BCC are completed.
Note 2. “Error detection priority” is applicable when multiple errors occur at the same time.
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
FINS-mini response text consists of MRC, SRC, MRES, SRES, and data.
No. of bytes
MRC
SRC
MRES
2
2
2
MRC, SRC
MRES, SRES
Data
SRES
Data
2
The same main request code and subrequest code as the command are
returned.
Main response code and subresponse code. Processing results are
indicated by combining these two codes. Each code is “00” at normal
completion.
Data differs with each command. Refer to 4-3 Command Types for details.
D MRES (Main Response Code)
MRES
“00”
“04”
MRES name
Normal completion
Service unsupported
“10”
Command format error
“11”
Parameter error
“22”
Status error
“30”
Access error
4-8
Meaning
The service was executed normally.
The Cam Positioner does not support the service specified in the
command.
The command (PDU) length differs from the length specified in
the service. The specified number of items does not match the
number of data items to be written.
Because the specified parameters (data) following the command
codes are incorrect, the service cannot be executed. Check the
parameters.
The service cannot be executed due to the current status of the
Cam Positioner.
An error relating to access to objects such as memory areas or
parameter areas
Communications
Chapter 4
D SRES (Subresponse Code)
MRES
“00”
“04”
SRES
“00”
“01”
SRES name
Normal completion
Unsupported command
“10”
“01”
Too long command
“02”
Too short command
“03”
Item/data count mismatch
“01”
Area type error
“03”
“04”
Beginning address range
error
End address range error
“0B”
Too long response
“00”
“03”
Other parameter errors
Operation error
“11”
“22”
“30”
“02”
“03”
“05”
Write-only
Read-only
No-object error
Meaning
The service was executed normally.
The service specified in the command is not
supported.
The command length is above the maximum
length.
The command length is below the minimum
length.
The specified number of items does not match the
number of data items to be written.
The area type (such as memory area or
parameter area) is not specified correctly.
The specified beginning address is outside the
allowable range.
The specified end address (beginning address +
the number of items) is outside the allowable
range.
The response length exceeds the maximum
packet length.
Other parameter errors
Operation cannot be performed as specified.
The service cannot be executed in the current
mode.
Read is impossible due to write-only area.
Write is impossible due to read-only area.
No objects such as memory areas or parameter
areas exist.
4-9
Communications
4-3
Chapter 4
Command Types
The following commands are used to communicate with a Cam Positioner.
S Memory Area Read: Reads the Resolver speed, present cam angle, cam output
status, executing bank, and control I/O status.
S Parameter Area Read:
Reads various parameters and cam programs.
S Parameter Area Write:
Writes various parameters and cam programs.
S Controller Data Read:
Reads the model and version.
S Unit Attribute Read:
Reads the model and communications buffer size.
S Controller Status Read:
Reads error codes and executing status.
S Operation Command:
Changes the executing status.
S Internode Echo Test:
Executes an internode echo test.
This section describes the contents of these FINS-mini command text (PDU) and FINSmini response text (PDU). The following examples show FINS-mini response text where
communications has terminated normally (MRES, SRES = “00”). For the entire frame
structure or the contents of MRES and SRES where communications has terminated
abnormally, refer to 4-2-1 Command Frame and 4-2-2 Response Frame.
The following symbols indicate which Cam Positioner mode can be used to execute
each command.
RUN:
Indicates a command that can be executed in RUN mode.
PRGM:
Indicates a command that can be executed in PRGM mode.
SET:
Indicates a command that can be executed in SET mode.
Note The commands that can be executed only in SET mode can also be executed in RUN mode if the
Operation Command (Operating Status Change Command) is executed in RUN mode when the
START signal is OFF and the status is normal.
4-3-1 Memory Area Read (RUN)
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“1”
2
SRC
“0”
Memory
area code
Beginning address
“1”
2
“0”
2
6
No. of items
“0”
4
Note 1. The memory area code is divided into the following three types.
40: Memory area data in byte (8 bits) units
80: Memory area data in word (16 bits) units
C0:Memory area data in long word (32 bits) units
Set the memory area code as ASCII code “40” (3430 Hex), “80” (3830 Hex), or “C0” (4330
Hex).
4-10
Communications
Chapter 4
Note 2. Set the beginning address as a four-digit ASCII code + “00.”
For example, the present cam angle (address 0002) is set as “000200.”
Note 3. In “No. of items,” set the number of items in the unit specified for the memory area code.
For example, revolver speed is memory area data in word units, so the number of items is 1
(set “0001”). Control I/O status is memory area data in byte units, so the number of items is 2
when both input and output are read.
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
SRC
“1”
“0”
2
MRES
“1”
“0”
2
“0”
2
SRES
“0”
Data
“0”
2
(as required)
H Contents of Memory Area
Address Memory
area
code
0000
0001
80
Name
Resolver
Speed
Explanation
Current Resolver speed (r/min): 4-digit BCD
0000 to 1600 (resolution: 360 divisions per revolution)
0000 to 0800 (resolution: 720 divisions per revolution)
Address 0000: Leftmost byte
Address 0001: Rightmost byte
0002
0003
80
Present
Cam
Angle
Present cam angle (in set unit): 4-digit BCD
0000 to 0359 (resolution: 360 divisions per revolution)
0000 to 0719 (resolution: 720 divisions per revolution)
Address 0002: Leftmost byte
Address 0003: Rightmost byte
0004
to
0007
C0
Cam
Output
Status
Cam output status
0: Output OFF
1: Output ON
b7
0008
40
b0
Address
0007
CAM8
CAM7
CAM6
CAM5
CAM4
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
Address
0006
CAM16
CAM15
CAM14
CAM13
CAM12
CAM11
CAM10
CAM9
Address
0005
CAM24
CAM23
CAM22
CAM21
CAM20
CAM19
CAM18
CAM17
Address
0004
CAM32
CAM31
CAM30
CAM29
CAM28
CAM27
CAM26
CAM25
Executing Executing bank No.: 2-digit BCD
Bank
01 to 08 (resolution: 360 divisions per revolution)
01 to 04 (resolution: 720 divisions per revolution)
4-11
Communications
Address
Memory
area
code
000A
000B
40
Chapter 4
Name
Explanation
Control
Control I/O signal status output
I/O Status
0: OFF
1: ON
Address 000A: Control input
b7
START
b0
---
---
---
TRIG
BANK3
BANK2
---
---
ERROR
MSDET
BANK1
Address 000B: Control output
b7
---
Note
b0
---
---
RUN
Bits indicated by “---” are set to 0.
Note 1. Specify the beginning address of FINS-mini command text as 4-digit ASCII code + “00.” For
example, when reading the executing bank, specify “000800” as the beginning address.
Note 2. The data structure shown in the “Explanation” column is the one inside the Cam Positioner. If
the data is read through CompoWay/F communications, it will be converted into ASCII code.
For example, when the Resolver speed is 800 r/min, data is stored as 08 Hex (leftmost byte:
Address 0000) and 00 Hex (rightmost byte: Address 0001) inside the Cam Positioner. This
data will be read as ASCII code “0800” (30 38 30 30 Hex) during communications. When
CAM1 to CAM8 are all ON, hexadecimal value FF is written to address 0004, but it will be read
as ASCII code “FF” (46 46 Hex) during communications.
4-3-2 Parameter Area Read/Write (SET)
H Parameter Area Read
D Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“2”
2
SRC
“0”
Parameter area code
Beginning address
No. of items
“1”
2
4
4
4
Note 1. The parameter area code is divided into the following three types.
4000: Parameters in byte (8 bits) units
8000: Parameters in word (16 bits) units
C000: Parameters in long word (32 bits) units
Set the parameter area code as ASCII code “4000,” “8000,” or “C000.”
Note 2. Set the beginning address as 4-digit ASCII code. For example, to read an origin compensation value from address 8000, set “8000.”
Note 3. In “No. of items,” set the number of items in the unit specified for the parameter area code. For
example, resolution/compensation settings are parameters in byte units, so the number of
items is 1. Origin compensation values are parameters in word units, so the number of items is
1. Cam programs for cams 1 to 8 of bank 1 are parameters in byte units, so the number of
items is 720.
4-12
Communications
Chapter 4
To set the number of items, represent it as a 4-digit hexadecimal number first, set the leftmost
bit to 1, then convert the hexadecimal code into ASCII code. For example, when the number of
items is 720, represent it as hexadecimal number 02D0 Hex first, set the leftmost bit to 1 to
obtain hexadecimal number 82D0 Hex, then set ASCII code “82D0” (38 32 44 30 Hex).
D Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of
bytes
SRC
MRES
SRES
“2” “0” “1” “0” “0” “0”
2
2
2
Parameter
area code
Beginning address
No. of items
4
4
4
Data
“0”
2
(as required)
Note The contents of MRC, SRC, parameter area code, beginning address, and No. of items are the
same as those of the command.
H Parameter Area Write
D Structure of FINS-min Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“2”
2
SRC
“0”
Parameter area code
Beginning address
4
4
No. of items
Data
“2”
2
4
Note 1. The parameter area code is divided into the following three types.
4000: Parameters in byte (8 bits) units
8000: Parameters in word (16 bits) units
C000: Parameters in long word (32 bits) units
Set the parameter area code as ASCII code “4000,” “8000,” or “C000.”
Note 2. Set the beginning address as 4-digit ASCII code. For example, to write an origin compensation value to address 8000, set “8000.”
Note 3. In “No. of items,” set the number of items in the unit specified for the parameter area code. For
example, resolution/compensation settings are parameters in byte units, so the number of
items is 1. Origin compensation values are parameters in word units, so the number of items is
1. Cam programs for cams 1 to 8 of bank 1 are parameters in byte units, so the number of
items is 720.
To set the number of items, represent it as a 4-digit hexadecimal number first, set the leftmost
bit to 1, then convert the hexadecimal code into ASCII code. For example, when the number of
items is 720, represent it as hexadecimal number 02D0 Hex first, set the leftmost bit to 1 to
obtain hexadecimal number 82D0 Hex, then set ASCII code “82D0” (38 32 44 30 Hex).
Note 4. In “Data,” set all data as ASCII code.
Example 1: Writing 200 as an origin compensation value
Parameter area code: “8000”; Beginning address: “0002”; No. of items: “8001”; Data: “0200”
Example 2: Clearing cam programs
Parameter area code: “4000”; Beginning address: “0100”; No. of items: “8001”; Data: “20”
D Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“2”
2
SRC
“0”
MRES
“2”
2
“0”
“0”
2
SRES
“0”
“0”
2
4-13
Communications
Chapter 4
H Contents of Parameter Area
Address Parameter
Name
area code
0000
4000
Resolution/
ComCom
pensation
Settings
Explanation
Default
Resolution selection, and the presence or absence of backlash and
advance angle compensations.
b7
b0
00
Present value output
0: OFF 1 to 4: Set value
Output hold 0: OFF 1: ON
Advance angle compensation 0: OFF 1: ON
Backlash compensation 0: OFF 1: ON
Resolution 0: 360 divisions per revolution
1: 720 divisions per revolution
0002
0003
0004
0005
8000
8000
0006
to
0009
C000
000A
to
000D
C000
000E
000F
8000
0010
to
0013
4-14
C000
Origin
Compensation
Value
Origin compensation value: 4-digit BCD from 0000 to 0359 (0719)
Backlash
Compensation
Value
Backlash compensation value: 4-digit BCD from 0000 to 0359 (0719)
Advance
Angle
Compensation
Value 1
Advance angle compensation value 1: 4-digit BCD
Advance
Angle
Compensation
Value 2
Advance angle compensation value 2: 4-digit BCD
0000
Address 0002: Leftmost byte
Address 0003: Rightmost byte
Address 0004:
Leftmost byte
Address 0005:
Rightmost byte
0000
Addresses 0006 and 0007: Speed data 0000 to 1600 (0800)
0000
Addresses 0008 and 0009: Angle data 0000 to 0359 (0719)
0000
Addresses 000A and 000B: Speed data 0000 to 1600 (0800)
0000
Addresses 000C and 000D: Angle data 0000 to 0359 (0719)
0000
Advance
Angle
Compensation
Value 3
Advance angle compensation value 3: 4-digit BCD from 0000 to 0359
(0719)
0000
Bank 1
Cam Data
Protect
Setting
Cam data protect setting
Address 000E: Leftmost byte
Address 000F: Rightmost byte
0: Not protected
1: Protected
b7
b0
Address
0013
CAM8
CAM7
CAM6
CAM5
CAM4
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
00
Address
0012
CAM
16
CAM
15
CAM
14
CAM
13
CAM
12
CAM
11
CAM
10
CAM9
00
Address
0011
CAM
24
CAM
23
CAM
22
CAM
21
CAM
20
CAM
19
CAM
18
CAM
17
00
Address
0010
CAM
32
CAM
31
CAM
30
CAM
29
CAM
28
CAM
27
CAM
26
CAM
25
00
Communications
Address
0014
to
0017
0018
to
001B
0020
to
002B
0030
to
003B
0040
to
004B
Parameter
Name
area code
C000
Bank 1
One-direction Function Setting
C000
C000
C000
C000
Bank 1
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Chapter 4
Explanation
Default
One-direction function setting
0: OFF
1: ON
b7
b0
Address
0017
CAM8
CAM7
CAM6
CAM5
CAM4
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
00
Address
0016
CAM
16
CAM
15
CAM
14
CAM
13
CAM
12
CAM
11
CAM
10
CAM9
00
Address
0015
CAM
24
CAM
23
CAM
22
CAM
21
CAM
20
CAM
19
CAM
18
CAM
17
00
Address
0014
CAM
32
CAM
31
CAM
30
CAM
29
CAM
28
CAM
27
CAM
26
CAM
25
00
Rotation direction setting
0: Forward
1: Reverse
b7
b0
Address
001B
CAM8
CAM7
CAM6
CAM5
CAM4
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
00
Address
001A
CAM
16
CAM
15
CAM
14
CAM
13
CAM
12
CAM
11
CAM
10
CAM9
00
Address
0019
CAM
24
CAM
23
CAM
22
CAM
21
CAM
20
CAM
19
CAM
18
CAM
17
00
Address
0018
CAM
32
CAM
31
CAM
30
CAM
29
CAM
28
CAM
27
CAM
26
CAM
25
00
Bank 2
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
Bank 3
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
Bank 4
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
All 00
Addresses 0020 to 0023: Bank 2 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0024 to 0027: Bank 2 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0028 to 002B: Bank 2 rotation direction setting
All 00
Addresses 0030 to 0033: Bank 3 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0034 to 0037: Bank 3 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0038 to 003B: Bank 3 rotation direction setting
All 00
Addresses 0040 to 0043: Bank 4 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0044 to 0047: Bank 4 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0048 to 004B: Bank 4 rotation direction setting
4-15
Communications
Address
0050
to
005B
0060
to
006B
0070
to
007B
0080
to
008B
4-16
Parameter
Name
area code
C000
Bank 5
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
C000
C000
C000
Chapter 4
Explanation
Same as for bank 1.
Default
All 00
Addresses 0050 to 0053: Bank 5 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0054 to 0057: Bank 5 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0058 to 005B: Bank 5 rotation direction setting
Bank 6
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
Bank 7
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
Bank 8
Cam Data
Protect
Setting,
One-direction Function Setting,and
Rotation
Direction
Setting
Same as for bank 1.
All 00
Addresses 0060 to 0063: Bank 6 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0064 to 0067: Bank 6 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0068 to 006B: Bank 6 rotation direction setting
All 00
Addresses 0070 to 0073: Bank 7 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0074 to 0077: Bank 7 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0078 to 007B: Bank 7 rotation direction setting
Addresses 0080 to 0083: Bank 8 cam data protect setting
Addresses 0084 to 0087: Bank 8 one-direction function setting
Addresses 0088 to 008B: Bank 8 rotation direction setting
All 00
Communications
Address
0100
Parameter
Name
area code
4000
Clear
C
Command
Chapter 4
Explanation
Program Clear, Parameter Clear, and Parameter Update
b7
Default
00
b0
Program Clear: Setting this bit to 1 executes Program
Clear.
Parameter Clear: Setting this bit to 1 executes Parameter
Clear.
Parameter Update: Setting this bit to 1 executes Parameter
Update.
Note
1. Setting the respective bits to 1 executes Program Clear, Parameter Clear, and Parameter Update. When the commands
are completed, the Cam Positioner sets these bits to 0. Therefore, after the Clear Command is submitted, reading address
0100 allows the user to check whether the command is being
executed or completed.
Note
2. When these bits are turned ON (set to 1) at the same time, Program Clear, Parameter Clear, and Parameter Update will be
processed in this order. (The specified commands will be all
processed.)
Note
3. Executing Program Clear erases all cam programs. (If there is
even one cam for which cam data protect has been set, Program Clear will not be executed.)
Note
4. Executing Parameter Clear initializes all parameters.
5. Executing Parameter Update enables the parameters that are
made valid after the power is turned OFF and then ON. (Therefore, if Parameter Update is used, there will be no need to turn
the power OFF and then ON when making the parameters valid.)
Function level selection data: 2-digit BCD
01
Note
0102
4000
Function
Level
Selection
Data
00: Function level 0 (for monitor only)
01: Function level 1 (for basic operations and monitor only)
02: Function level 2 (for all functions)
4-17
Communications
Address
1000
to
12CF
Parameter
Name
area code
4000
Cam
Programs
for Cams 1
to 8 of
Bank 1
Chapter 4
Explanation
Default
All 00
Program status
0: Output OFF
1: Output ON
b7
b0
Address
1000
Cam 1 angle 0 state
Cam 2 angle 0 state
Cam 8 angle 0 state
Address
12CF
Cam 1 angle 719 state
Cam 2 angle 719 state
Cam 8 angle 719 state
1300
to
15CF
4000
Cam
Programs
for Cams 9
to 16 of
Bank 1
All 00
Program status
0:
Output OFF
1:
Output ON
b7
b0
Address
1300
Cam 9 angle 0 state
Cam 10 angle 0 state
Cam 16 angle 0 state
Address
15CF
Cam 9 angle 719 state
Cam 10 angle 719 state
Cam 16 angle 719 state
1600
to
18CF
4000
Cam
Programs
for Cams
17 to 24 of
Bank 1
All 00
Program status
0:
Output OFF
1:
Output ON
b7
Address
1600
b0
Cam 17 angle 0 state
Cam 18 angle 0 state
Cam 24 angle 0 state
Address
18CF
Cam 17 angle 719 state
Cam 18 angle 719 state
Cam 24 angle 719 state
4-18
Communications
Address
1900
to
1BCF
Parameter
Name
area code
4000
Cam
Programs
for Cams
25 to 32 of
Bank 1
Chapter 4
Explanation
Default
All 00
Program status
0:
Output OFF
1:
Output ON
b7
b0
Address
1900
Cam 25 angle 0 state
Cam 26 angle 0 state
Cam 32 angle 0 state
Address
1BCF
Cam 25 angle 719 state
Cam 26 angle 719 state
Cam 32 angle 719 state
2000
to
2BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 2
Same as for bank 1
All 00
3000
to
3BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 3
Same as for bank 1
All 00
4000
to
4BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 4
Same as for bank 1
All 00
5000
to
5BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 5
Same as for bank 1
All 00
6000
to
6BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 6
Same as for bank 1
All 00
7000
to
7BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 7
Same as for bank 1
All 00
8000
to
8BCF
4000
Cam
Programs
of Bank 8
Same as for bank 1
All 00
Note 1. The 3F88L-160 (16-point type) has an area for storing cam programs for cams 17 to 32, but
the contents of these programs cannot be displayed from the Unit.
Note 2. Even if the resolution is set to 360 divisions per revolution, there is an area for storing the state
of cam angles 360 to 719.
4-3-3 Controller Data Read (RUN, PRGM, SET)
Reads the model and version of the Controller.
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“5”
2
SRC
“0”
“1”
2
4-19
Communications
Chapter 4
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
SRC
“5”
“0”
2
MRES
“1”
“0”
2
SRES
“0”
“0”
2
Model
Version
20
20
“0”
2
Note 1. The model is returned as “3F88L-160_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” (16-point type) or “3F88L-162_ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _” (32-point type). “_” represents a space code (20 Hex).
Note 2. The version is returns as “Ver.j.j _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.”
4-3-4 Unit Attribute Read (RUN, PRGM, SET)
Reads the model and communications buffer size (either send or receive buffer size, whichever smaller).
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
SRC
“5”
“0”
2
“3”
2
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“5”
2
SRC
“0”
MRES
“3”
2
“0”
SRES
“0”
“0”
2
Model
“0”
Buffer size
“0”
2
10
“5”
“B”
“E”
4
Note 1. The model is returned as “3F88L-160_” (16-point type) or “3F88L-162_” (32-point type). “_”
represents a space code (20 Hex).
Note 2. The communications buffer size of the Cam Positioner is “05BE” (1,470 bytes).
4-3-5 Controller Status Read (RUN, PRGM, SET)
Reads the error codes and executing status of the Controller.
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
4-20
“6”
2
SRC
“0”
“1”
2
Communications
Chapter 4
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
“6”
SRC
“0”
2
MRES
“1”
“0”
2
“0”
SRES
“0”
Status
Error data
“0”
2
2
2
2
Note 1. ”Status” is returned as the following one-byte data that is converted into ASCII code.
b7
b0
Executing status
0: When an error occurs in RUN mode,
or PRGM or SET mode is entered
1: When there is no error in RUN mode
1: When the communications function is being executed to change the operating state
1: When an error occurs
Bit 0 (executing status) is also set to 1 when the communications function is being executed to
change the operating state (such as parameter settings) in RUN mode. For example, when the
operating state is changed in RUN mode and there are no errors, “Status” will be set to “41.”
Note 2. “Error data” is returned as an error code (** of E-**).
4-3-6 Operation Command (RUN)
• Executing the Operation Command (Operating State Change Command) with command code “01”
allows parameters to be changed while in RUN mode.
• The Operation Command can be used to change parameters only when the Cam Positioner is in RUN
mode, the START signal is OFF, and there are no errors.
• Execute the Operation Command with command code “00” to return from the state in which parameters can be changed to RUN mode. This command is valid only when the Cam Positioner is in RUN
mode, the START signal is OFF, and there are no errors.
• If the mode selection switch on the Cam Positioner is operated in the state in which parameters can be
changed, communications will be interrupted and the mode specified by the switch will be entered.
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“3”
No. of bytes
“0”
SRC
“0”
2
Command code
“5”
2
2
Note The meaning of the command code is as follows:
“01”: Start (Switches from RUN mode to the state in which parameters can be changed)
“00”: Stop (Switches from the state in which parameters can be changed to RUN mode)
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“3”
No. of bytes
“0”
2
SRC
“0”
MRES
“5”
2
“0”
“0”
2
SRES
“0”
Command code
“0”
2
2
4-21
Communications
Chapter 4
4-3-7 Internode Echo Test (RUN, PRGM, SET)
Performs an internode echo test between the host CPU and the Cam Positioner.
H Structure of FINS-mini Command Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
SRC
“8”
2
“0”
Test data
“1”
2
Note Any data except 02 Hex (start) and 03 Hex (stop) can be used for internode echo tests.
H Structure of FINS-mini Response Text (PDU)
MRC
“0”
No. of bytes
4-22
“8”
2
SRC
“0”
MRES
“1”
2
“0”
“0”
2
SRES
“0”
“0”
2
Test data
Communications
4-4
Chapter 4
Executing CompoWay/F Commands with Protocol Macros
CompoWay/F communications can be easily performed by using the protocol macros of
the CS1-series Serial Communications Boards and Units. The Serial Communications
Boards and Units are provided with standard CompoWay/F communication protocol
called “CompoWay/F Master,” which allows the Programmable Controller to execute
CompoWay/F commands for the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner without having to be
aware of CompoWay/F protocols.
H Configuration
S SYSMAC CS1-series Programmable
Controller (CompoWay/F Master)
Serial Communications Board or Unit
CPU Unit
Executes send/receive
sequences of standard
system protocol
“CompoWay/F Master.”
CompoWay/F command
Response
S 3F88L-160/162 Cam
Positioner
(CompoWay/F Slave)
H System Components
Item
CS1-series Programmable Controller
Model
High-speed type: CS1H-CPU67/CPU66/CPU65/CPU64/CPU63
Serial Communications Board
Standard type: CS1G-CPU45/CPU44/CPU43/CPU42
CS1W-SCB21 (RS-232C × 2 ports)
Serial Communications Unit
Programming Device Connecting
Cables (for RS-232C port)
CS1W-SCB41 (RS-232C × 1 port, RS-422/485 × 1 port)
CS1W-SCU21 (RS-232C × 2 ports)
XW2Z-200S-CV (2 m)
XW2Z-500S-CV (5 m)
Note The following support tool is required to trace the executing status of protocol macros.
WS02-PSTC1-E CX-Protocol
4-23
Communications
Chapter 4
H Manuals for Related Devices and Support Tools
Title
SYSMAC CS1-series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS1-series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS1-series Serial Communications Boards/Unit Operation Manual
CX-Protocol Operation Manual
Number
W339
W340
W336
W344
H Standard System Protocols (Sequence Numbers)
• To execute a CompoWay/F command for the Cam Positioner, execute sequence No. 600 (#0258) or
sequence No. 602 (#025A) within the standard system protocol by using a PMCR instruction.
• The following table shows a relationship between sequence numbers and CompoWay/F commands
for the Cam Positioner.
Standard system protocol
Sequence No. 600 (#0258):
Data transfer with ASCII code
conversion
With response
CompoWay/F commands for Cam Positioner
• Memory Area Read (0101 Hex)
• Parameter Area Write (0202 Hex)
• Parameter Area Read (0201 Hex)
• Controller Status Read (0601 Hex)
Sequence No. 602 (#025A):
Data transfer without ASCII code
conversion
With response
• Operation Command (3005 Hex)
• Controller Data Read (0501 Hex)
• Unit Attribute Read (0503 Hex)
• Internode Echo Test (0801 Hex)
H Using CompoWay/F Standard System Protocol
• To send CompoWay/F commands from a CS1-series Programmable Controller to a Cam Positioner
by using protocol macros, execute the send-receive sequences of the CompoWay/F Master protocol
provided as a standard system protocol by using protocol macro (PMCR) instructions within the ladder
program of the CS1-series CPU Unit.
• Use the following procedure to specify PMCR instructions.
1. Specify the sequence number as a hexadecimal value in the second operand of the PMCR instruction.
2. The first table Send Data Word Allocations (Third Operand of PMCR Instruction) on the following
page shows the data format of operand S and subsequent operands in the PMCR instruction. Specify this format of data in operand S and subsequent operands.
3. The second table Receive Data Word Allocations (Fourth Operand of PMCR Instruction) on the following page shows the data format of operand D and subsequent operands in the PMCR instruction. This format of data will be set in operand D and subsequent operands. Normally, set 0000 Hex
as the default value in D+0.
Control data: Communications port No., serial port No., destination unit address
Control data: Send-receive sequence No. (0258 Hex for sequence No. 600, 025A Hex for sequence No. 602)
First word No. of send data
First word No. of received data storage
4-24
Communications
Chapter 4
D Control Data C1
Destination unit address
Serial Communications Unit: Unit number + 10 Hex
Serial Communications Board: E1 Hex
Serial port No. (physical port)
Communications port (internal logical port): 0 to 7 Hex
D Send Data Word Allocations (Third Operand of PMCR Instruction)
Word No.
S+0
Data format
No. of send data words
(4-digit Hex)
S+1
Reserved
S+2
S+3
Data
Set the number of words of data to be sent (from S+0 to the end
of the data).
Setting range: 0005 Hex to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 in decimal)
Node No.
The node number of the Cam Positioner is 00 Hex.
(2-digit BCD) Set 0000 Hex in S+1.
MRC
SRC
Set the command code of the service to be used. (Refer to
(2-digit Hex) (2-digit Hex) 4-2-1 Command Frame.)
No. of send data bytes
Set the amount of data that follows the command code (MRC,
(4-digit Hex)
SRC) and ends immediately before ETX.
Setting range: 0000 Hex to 0492 Hex (0 to 984 in decimal)
For sequence No. 600, set the number of bytes of data that has
been converted into ASCII code (that is, the number of bytes
set in S+4 and subsequent operands multiplied by 2).
S+4
onwards
Send data (4-digit Hex)
For sequence No. 602, set the number of bytes set in S+4 and
subsequent operands.
Set the data to be sent.
For sequence No. 600, data that has been converted from
hexadecimal to ASCII code is sent.
For sequence No. 602, data is sent without being converted.
D Receive Data Word Allocations (Fourth Operand of PMCR Instruction)
Word No.
Data format
D+0
No. of received data
words (4-digit Hex)
D+1
D+2
Response code
(4-digit Hex)
Received data (4-digit
Hex)
Data
The number of received data words (from D+0 to the end of received
data) is stored.
Range: 0003 Hex to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 in decimal)
Response code (MRES, SRES) is stored as a 4-digit hexadecimal
value.
Data that follows the response code (MRES, SRES) and ends
immediately before ETX is stored.
For sequence No. 600, data that starts from the largest word number of
the received data words (D + number of received data words + 1) and
continues until D+2 in descending order is stored.
For sequence No. 602, data is stored sequentially starting from D+2.
4-25
Communications
Chapter 4
H Examples of Executing CompoWay/F Commands with Protocol
Macros
D Examples of Monitoring Resolver Speed and Present Cam Angle
Always
ON
Protocol Macro
Executing FLag
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
PMCR
Protocol macro instruction
#01E1
Control data: Communications port No. 0, serial port No. 1, and inner board are used.
#0258
Control data: Send-receive sequence No. 600 (with ASCII code conversion and response) is set.
D00000
First word No. of send data: DM00000 is set.
D00500
First word No. of received data storage: DM00500 is set.
Send Data Word Allocations
DM address
Data
D00000
0007
No. of send data words: There are seven words from D00000 to D00006, so 0007 Hex is set.
D00001
0000
D00002
0101
D00003
000C
D00004
8000
D00005
0000
Node No.: The node number of Cam Positioner is 00, so 000 Hex is set.
MRC, SRC: Memory Area Read is used, so MRC = 01 Hex and SRC = 01 Hex are set.
(Hexadecimal settings are converted into ASCII code during communications.)
No. of send data bytes: If send data from D00004 to D00006 (6 bytes) are converted into
ASCII code, it will become 12 bytes. So, 000C Hex is set.
Data part of FINS-mini command text (PDU): Data is set in Hex. The settings will be
converted into ASCII code during communications.
Same as above.
D00006
0002
Same as above.
Note Data part of FINS-mini command text (PDU)
Memory
area code
Beginning address
No. of items
“0”
No. of bytes after
ASCII conversion
2
6
“0”
4
Memory area code: The memory area code for Resolver speed and present cam angle is “80.”
Beginning address: The address for Resolver speed is “0000.”
No. of items: There are two items (Resolver speed and present cam angle), so “0002” is set.
Receive Data Word Allocations
DM address
Data
D00500
0004
D00501
0000
D00502
0359
D00503
0800
4-26
No. of received data words: There are four words from D00500 to D00503, so 0004
Hex is stored.
Response code: MRES = 00 and SRES = 00 are stored at normal completion.
Received data: The present cam angle (359 in this example) is stored
after being converted from ASCII code into a hexadecimal value.
Received data: The cam speed (800 r/min in this example) is stored after
being converted from ASCII code into a hexadecimal value.
Communications
Chapter 4
Note For sequence No. 600, received data is stored from the largest word number sequentially to D+2.
In the above example, Resolver speed data “08” and “00” and present cam angle data “03” and
“59” are received as ASCII data in this order, and D00503 and D00502 are converted into hexadecimal values in this order.
D Examples of Monitoring Errors
Always ON
Protocol Macro Communications
Executing Flag Port Enabled Flag
PMCR
Protocol macro instruction
#01E1
Control data: Communications port No. 0, serial port No. 1, and inner board are used.
#0258
Control data: Send-receive sequence No. 600 (with ASCII code conversion and response) is set.
D00000
First word No. of send data: DM00000 is set.
D00500
First word No. of received data storage: DM00500 is set.
Send Data Word Allocations
DM address
Data
D00000
0004
No. of send data words: There are four words from D00000 to D00003, so 0004 Hex is set.
D00001
0000
Node No.: The node number of Cam Positioner is 00, so 0000 Hex is set.
D00002
0601
MRC, SRC: Controller Status Read is used, so MRC = 06 and SRC = 01 are set.
D00003
0000
No. of sent data bytes: There is no data to be sent, so 0000 Hex is set.
Receive Data Word Allocations
DM address
Data
D00500
0003
D00501
0000
D00502
8010
No. of received data words: There are three words from D00500 to D00502,
so 0003 Hex is stored.
Response code: MRES = 00 and SRES = 00 are stored at normal completion.
Received data: “Status” (80 in this example) and “error data” (10 in this example)
are stored after being converted from ASCII code to hexadecimal values.
Note 1. The content of “Status” is as follows:
b7
b0
Executing status
0: While in error status or in PRGM or SET mode
1: When there is no error in RUN mode
1: When the communications function is being executed to change the operating status
1: When an error occurs
In this example, “status” = 80 indicates that an error has occurred.
4-27
Communications
Chapter 4
Note 2. An error code is stored when an error has occurred. In this example, “error data” = 10 indicates a Resolver disconnection error.
4-28
5
Chapter 5
Operation
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Diagnosis using Error Codes
CompoWay/F Communications Errors
Troubleshooting
Inspection and Maintenance
Cam Positioner Replacement
Operation
5-1
Chapter 5
Diagnosis using Error Codes
If the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner detects an error, the error code (E-**)will appear in
the SPEED/ON display. All control outputs (RUN, M⋅DET, ERROR) will turn OFF. The
cam output will vary depending on the output hold function settings.
The Cam Positioner errors will be detected during the following processes.
S At power ON: Hardware check, program check, and power interrupt check during program write/save.
S During operation: Error check in RUN mode.
S During programming: ON region duplication errors in PRGM mode, cam data protect
input prohibit checking, etc.
S While setting parameters: Communications error checks in SET mode.
If an error code is displayed, determine the cause and take appropriate countermeasures.
H Errors Codes and Countermeasures
Note The “F” mark in the cam output column indicates that cam outputs are turned OFF regardless of
the output hold settings. The “f” mark indicates that if output hold is set, the output status immediately before the error was generated will be maintained. If output hold is not set, cam outputs will
be turned OFF. (Refer to 3-6-9 Output Hold Function for information.)
Error
code
E-00
Error name
Hardware
failure
Description
Memory
read/write
check error
when power
turned ON.
Cam
Probable
output
cause
F
Malfunction
due to noise
(system
recovers when
power is
turned ON
again.)
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
5-2
Possible solution
Check if noise has
been generated
when or after the
power was turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Error reset
method
Turn the
power ON
again.
---
Operation
Error
code
E-01
Error name
Power
interruption
during
programming
Chapter 5
Description
Cam
Probable
output
cause
Power turned F
Power turned
OFF while
OFF while
program being
program being
edited.
edited.
RESET input
turned ON
while program
being edited.
RESET input
turned ON due
to noise while
program
being
p
g
g
edited.
di d
E-02
Power failure
during write to
non-volatile
memory
Power turned
OFF during
data save to
non-volatile
memory.
F
Power turned
OFF while
writing to
memory.
RESET input
turned ON
while writing to
memory.
RESET input
turned ON due
to noise while
writing
g to
memory.
E-10
Resolver
disconnection
error
Resolver cable F
disconnected
during
teaching
g or
trial
i l operation
i
in RUN mode
or error in
Resolver
interface
circuit.
Resolver
connector has
been
disconnected.
Resolver
connector
connection
imperfect.
Resolver cable
disconnected.
Resolver
detection
circuit error.
Possible solution
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Error reset
method
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Then re-input
p
the cam
program.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Then re-input
p
the cam
program.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Check that the
Resolver connector
is connected
securely.
y
Replace the
Resolver cable.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
p
Cl
Clear
Key
K to
clear the error.
---
5-3
Operation
Error
code
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-22
5-4
Error name
Sum check
error in
program
memory
System
program sum
check error
Memory error
Cam data
protect input
prohibited
Chapter 5
Description
Memory sum
check error
when power
turned ON.
System
program sum
check error
when power
turned ON.
Cam
Probable
output
cause
F
Malfunction
due to noise
(system
recovers when
power is
turned ON
again.)
F
Access to
f
non-volatile
memory not
completed
within set time.
Attempt made f
to edit
cam-protected
cam data.
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
Malfunction
due to noise
(system
recovers when
power is
turned ON
again.)
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
Write to
non-volatile
memory not
completed due
to noise.
Read from
non-volatile
memory not
completed due
to noise.
Attempt made
to edit
cam-protected
cam data.
Possible solution
Check if noise has
been generated
when or after the
power was turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Error reset
method
Turn ON the
power again.
---
Check if noise
occurs when or after
the power is turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Turn ON the
power again.
Find the source of
the error and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Keyy to
clear the error.
Find the source of
the error and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
---
Once the error has
Press the
been cleared, either Clear Key to
remove the cam data clear the error.
protect, or edit
different cam data
that has not been
cam data protected.
Operation
Error
code
E-23
Error name
Cam program
duplication
error
E-31
Communications error
E-33
Verification
error
Chapter 5
Description
Cam
Probable
output
cause
Attempt made f
Attempt made
to write
to write
program to the
program to the
ON section of
ON section of
an existing
an existing
program
program
(including
(including
attempt with
attempt with
the teaching
the teaching
function)
function)
No response
f
Different baud
from the Slave
rate to Slave
Unit; commuUnit.
nications data
error; different
diff
Slave Unit not
baud rate to
operating.
Slave.
Slave and
Master data
do not match.
f
Possible solution
Error reset
method
Once the error has
Press the
been cleared, write
Clear Key to
the correct steps that clear the error.
are not duplicated.
Align the Master and Press the
Clear Key to
Slave Unit baud
clear the error.
rates (Function No.
b, Parameter No. 6).
Check the display on
the Slave Unit
(Bank/Function
display: “t”;
Cam/Parameter
display: “0”) and
re-transmit the data
from the Master Unit.
Slave Unit
Clear the errors on
error.
both the Master and
Slave Units and
re-transmit the data.
Slave Unit not Check the display on
in communica- the Slave Unit
tions mode.
(Bank/Function
display: “t”;
Cam/Parameter
display: “0”) and
re-transmit the data
from the Master Unit.
CommunicaCheck and adjust the
tions cable
communications
wired incorcable wiring.
rectly.
Press the
Different
Check that the cam
Clear Key to
programs or
program and
clear the error.
parameters
parameters are
are verified.
correct for each Cam
Positioner.
Data corrupted Find the source of
due to noise
the noise and take
during comappropriate
munications.
countermeasures.
5-5
Operation
Error
code
(Error
indicator not
lit)
Error name
Power OFF
watchdog
error
Chapter 5
Description
Power is not
turned ON;
RESET input
has been
turned ON;
software error
Cam
Probable
output
cause
F
Power has
turned OFF.
RESET input
has been
turned ON.
RESET input
has been
turned ON due
to noise.
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
5-6
Possible solution
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Error reset
method
Turn ON the
power again.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Replace the Cam
--Positioner.
Operation
5-2
Chapter 5
CompoWay/F Communications Errors
If the 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner detects an error when data is being transferred
using the CompoWay/F, it will return an end code other than “00” indicating a communications error. If an end code indicating a communications error has been returned,
determine the cause and take the appropriate countermeasures.
Communications errors may be caused by incorrect wiring of the communications cable
or noise during transmission. Therefore, always check the following points first.
S Check that communications cables are correctly wired.
S Check that communications cable connectors are securely connected.
S Check that there is no source of noise in the vicinity and that data has not been corrupted by noise during transmission.
H Communications Errors
End code
Error name
“0F”
FINS command
error
“10”
“11”
“12”
“13”
Parity error
Framing error
Overrun error
BCC error
Description
The specified FINSmini command cannot
be executed.
A parity error has occurred for one of the
characters during
g data
reception.
A framing error has occurred at the response
frame.
An overrun error has
occurred.
BCC for response
frame is incorrect.
Probable cause
A command not supported by the Cam Positioner has been issued.
The Cam Positioner
has an error.
The Cam Positioner is
in a different mode (not
in a mode for which the
issued command is enabled).
The communications
cable is wired incorrectly.
Data has been corrupted due to noise during communications.
The communications
cable is wired incorrectly.
Data has been corrupted due to noise
during transmission.
The communications
cable is wired incorrectly.
Data has been corrupted due to noise during communications.
Data has been corrupted due to noise during communications.
The BCC operation is
incorrect.
Probable solution
Check the communications command.
Check the Cam Positioner.
Check the Cam Positioner mode.
Check the cable wiring.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the cable wiring.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the cable wiring.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the communications protocol.
5-7
Operation
End code
Error name
“14”
Format error
“16”
“18”
5-8
Description
Probable cause
FINS frame is incorrect. The communications
cable is wired incorrectly.
The frame has been
corrupted due to noise
during communications.
The incorrect frame has
been transmitted.
Subaddress error Subaddress for reData has been corceived frame is incorrupted due to noise
rect ((not supported).
pp
)
during communications.
The transmitted subaddress is not “00.”
Frame length er- Received frame exThe received frame exror
ceeds available (supceeds the number of
ported) number of bysupported bytes.
tes.
Chapter 5
Probable solution
Check the cable wiring.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the communications protocol.
Check the cause of the
noise.
Check the communications protocol.
Check the communications protocol.
Operation
5-3
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting
Problem
Nothing appears on the display.
The ERROR terminal is H.
H
Nothing appear on the display.
The ERROR terminal is L.
There are no cam outputs.
Probable cause
Power supply error.
RESET signal has been input.
Circuit error.
Watchdog timer error.
Display circuit error.
A cam program has not been
input.
Cam output power supply error.
BANK selection fault.
START signal input fault.
Control signal power supply fault.
A specific
p
cam output
p does not
turn ON.
ON
Unprogrammed outputs are being
made.
Circuit error.
Wiring error.
Externally-connected part error.
Output transistor error.
A new cam program has been
input without clearing the existing
cam program.
When copying a cam program
from a 3F88L-160 Cam Positioner
to a 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner, a
cam program containing CAM17
to 32 has been input to the
3F88L-160 Cam Positioner (when
a cam program has been copied
to the 3F88L-160 from a
3F88L-162 beforehand.)
Program memory error.
Possible solution
Supply the correct power supply
voltage.
Check the connected wiring.
Replace
p
the Cam Positioner.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Check the cam program.
Check the power supply voltage.
Check the connected wiring.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Check the connected wiring.
Replace the externally-connected
part.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Check the cam program.
Check the cam program and
delete any unnecessary cam
programs.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
5-9
Operation
Problem
Cam outputs are strange.
Exiting of a cam program that
shouldn’t be there (CAM17 to 32).
Origin compensation has been
performed but the origin
p
g does not
return to 0.
The origin
g position
p
is displaced.
p
The present angle is displaced.
The operation keys do not work.
5-10
Chapter 5
Probable cause
A new cam program has been
input without clearing the existing
cam program.
When using the advance angle
compensation function, a cam
program containing changing cam
outputs has been input near the
advance angle compensation
position/the position where the
advance angle will be
compensated (during acceleration,
cam outputs may be missed or
output twice).
When using the copy function,
data has been mistakenly copied
from another Cam Positioner
when reading data from that Cam
Positioner.
When using the copy function,
data has been mistakenly written
to another Cam Positioner when
reading data from that Cam
Positioner.
Program memory error.
When copying a cam program
from a 3F88L-160 Cam Positioner
to a 3F88L-162 Cam Positioner, a
cam program containing CAM17
to 32 has been input to the
3F88L-160 Cam Positioner (when
a cam program has been copied
to the 3F88L-160 from a
3F88L-162 beforehand.)
An origin compensation value has
been set.
The Resolver is rotating.
Circuit error.
A TRIG signal has been input.
The coupling is displaced.
The temperature variation is great.
Possible solution
Check the cam program.
Set advance angle compensation
value 3 (advance angle
compensation position) to a
section where the cam outputs do
not change.
Do not use cam outputs during
acceleration as operation signals.
Check the parameters and cam
programs of the source Cam
Positioner and then perform the
copy operation.
Set the parameters for the source
Cam Positioner, and, once all cam
programs have been re-input,
perform the copy operation.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Check the cam program and
delete any unnecessary cam
programs.
Check the origin compensation
value.
Check the machinery operation.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Check the connection wiring.
Check the Resolver coupling.
Check the ambient temperature
variation.
Check the Resolver cable.
The Resolver cable is corrupted
and shorted with the frame ground
(FG).
Circuit error.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
The functions are limited by the
Check and, if necessary, adjust
function level selection.
the function level selection
(Function No. U) and turn OFF the
power and then turn it ON again.
Circuit error.
Replace the Cam Positioner.
Operation
Problem
The cam output position is
different to the one set using the
teaching
g function.
When the speed increases, the
timing of peripheral device
operation is late.
Chapter 5
Probable cause
Backlash compensation has been
enabled after teaching has been
performed.
With backlash compensation
enabled, the load side (driven
side) instead of the Resolver axle
(drive side) has been manually
rotated and teaching performed.
(Backlash compensation will work
in reverse.)
Teaching has been performed
while the Resolver is rotating (less
than 4 r/min).
The advance angle compensation
function is not used.
The advance angle compensation
function is not enabled.
Possible solution
With the backlash compensation
already enabled, perform the
teaching operation again.
Manually rotate the Resolver axle
(drive side) and perform teaching
again.
Perform teaching again with the
Resolver stationary.
Use the trial operation and
adjustment operation functions to
adjust the cam program (ON/OFF
angle data).
Set the advance angle
compensation function (Function
No. b, Parameter No. 3 to 5 and
Function No. H and Parameter
No. 2) and turn OFF the power
and turn it ON again.
Enable the advance angle
compensation function (Function
No. H, Parameter No. 2) and turn
OFF the power and turn it ON
again.
5-11
Operation
5-4
Chapter 5
Inspection and Maintenance
H Regular Inspections
There are no parts that need to be constantly maintained for the Cam Positioner equipment operation
but the following items should be checked during regular inspections to maintain performance.
• Check that the connectors are firmly connected.
• Check that there is no excessive strain on or any damage to the cables.
• Check that the Resolver rotates smoothly. Check that the axle is not displaced.
• Check that there is no excessive force on the couplings. Check that they are securely fastened.
• Check that the screws for all the terminals on the Unit are securely fastened.
H Replacement Couplings
If a Coupling has been lost, purchase the following replacement items.
Product name
Coupling for 3F88L-RS17 Resolver
Coupling for 3F88L-RS15 Resolver
5-12
Model
3F88L-RL10
3F88L-RL6
Operation
5-5
Chapter 5
Cam Positioner Replacement
H Procedure
Perform the following procedure when replacing the Cam Positioner Unit.
This procedure is applicable when the data (cam programs and parameters) in the original Cam Positioner is normal and the copy function is operating normally.
If the data has been corrupted or the copy function does not operate normally, use the operation keys on
the new Cam Positioner to input the data and make the settings based on the original cam program data
and parameter settings.
1. Preparation
a) Check that the original Cam Positioner data (cam programs and parameters) is correct. (Refer to
3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking and 3-6 Applied Functions.)
b) Set the CW/CCW setting switch on the new Cam Positioner to the same position as on the original Cam Positioner. (Refer to 3-5-2 Initial Settings.)
c) Delete all cam data protects on the new Cam Positioner and then turn OFF the power supply and
turn it ON again to enable this setting. (Refer to 3-6-7 Cam Protect.)
d) Use the copy function and copy the data (cam programs and parameters) from the original Cam
Positioner to the new Cam Positioner. (Refer to 3-6-13 Copy Function.)
e) Check that the data (cam programs and parameters) on the new Cam Positioner is correct. (Refer to 3-5-3 Cam Program Creating and Checking and 3-6 Applied Functions.)
2. Replacement
Replace the Cam Positioner and check the wiring. (Refer to Chapter 2 Design).
3. Compensation
Move the machinery to the origin compensation value position and perform origin compensation.
(Refer to 3-6-4 Origin Compensation and Origin Shift.)
4. Confirmation
Start operation using the new Cam Positioner.
Make adequate checks to ensure that the machinery is operating without any problem.
Adjust the cam programs if necessary. (Refer to 3-5-6 Start Operation, 3-5-7 I/O Monitor Function,
and 3-5-8 Control I/O Signals.)
Note If the machinery cannot be moved to the origin compensation position from when the original Cam
Positioner was set up, perform origin compensation at a different position as outlined below. The
settings can be changed to the same as the original Cam Positioner by re-writing the origin compensation value parameters.
a) Write the origin compensation value for the original Cam Positioner (Function No. b, Parameter
No. 1).
b) After the Cam Positioner has been replaced, move the machinery to the position where origin
compensation will be performed.
c) Set the origin compensation value for that position and turn OFF the power supply and turn it ON
again to enable this setting.
5-13
Operation
d) Perform origin compensation.
e) Change the origin compensation value to that of the original Cam Positioner.
5-14
Chapter 5
6
Chapter 6
Specifications
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
Cam Positioner Specifications
Resolver Specifications
I/O Block Specifications
Display Specifications
Specifications
6-1
Chapter 6
Cam Positioner Specifications
H General Specifications
Model
Power supply voltage
Allowable power
supply voltage
Current consumption
Inrush current
I/O power supply
Allowable I/O power
supply voltage
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Ambient operating
temperature
Ambient operating
humidity
Ambient operating
environment
Ambient storage
temperature
Terminal screws
Momentary power
interruption detection
time
External dimensions
Weight
Degree of protection
Mounting method
6-2
3F88L-160
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
85 to 264 V AC
3F88L-162
18 VA max.
40 A/10 ms max.
24 V DC/145 mA
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
20 MΩ min. between all AC power supply external terminals and the protective
ground terminal (500 V)
2,300 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between all AC power supply external terminals
and the protective ground terminal (leakage current of 10 mA max.)
1,500 Vp-p, pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs, 1-ns rising pulse (noise simulator)
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm single amplitude
57 to 150 Hz with an acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 for 80 minutes each in X, Y, and Z
directions (8 minutes x 10 times = 80 minutes)
147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
0 to 55°C
10 to 90% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
--20 to 75°C
Power supply input section:
M3.5 screws
Control I/O section:
M3 screws
Power interruptions of 15 ms or less are not detected.
110 × 100 × 82.5 mm (W × H × D)
1 kg max.
Panel-mounting
M4 screws (2 points) or DIN track mounting
Specifications
Chapter 6
H Performance Specifications
Model
Number of outputs
Output performance
Number of banks
Display
Response revolutions
Detection cycle
Repeatability
Memory backup
Control resolution
Origin compensation
Backlash
compensation
Advance angle
compensation
3F88L-160
3F88L-162
16
32
Open collector output
Maximum switching capacity: 300 mA at 26.4 V DC (1.6 A max. per connector)
8 banks (at the resolution of 360), 4 banks (at the resolution of 720)
7-segment LED (execution bank, number of revolutions, and present cam angle)
1,600 r/min (at the resolution of 360), 800 r/min (at the resolution of 720)
100 µs max.
0.2°
Non-volatile memory (EEPROM), number of write operations: 100,000
1/360 (at the resolution of 360), 1/720 (at the resolution of 720)
1 to 359 (at the resolution of 360), 1 to 719 (at the resolution of 720)
1 to 179 (at the resolution of 360), 1 to 359 (at the resolution of 720)
Advance angle input range: 1 to 359 (at the resolution of 360), 1 to 719 (at the
resolution of 720)
Control input
Speed input range: 1 to 1,600 (at the resolution of 360), 1 to 800 (at the resolution
of 720)
Note When the speed input is set to 0, the advance angle input must be 0.
START, TRIG, BANK1 to BANK3, RESET
Control output
Photocoupler input with an input impedance of 4.7 kΩ
RUN, ERROR, M-DET
Speed detection
accuracy
Open collector output, maximum switching capacity of 300 mA at 26.4 V DC
5 r/min max.
6-3
Specifications
6-2
Chapter 6
Resolver Specifications
H Specifications
Type
Model
Axial diameter
Axial load
Total length
Mounting method
Friction torque
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Degree of protection
Frequency
Primary voltage
Electrical malfunction
Maximum speed
Coupling
Wiring method
Applicable cable
Color
Ambient operating
temperature
Large diameter
3F88L-RS17
10 dia.
Thrust: 196 N max.
High torque
3F88L-RS17T
Connector
3F88L-RS15
6 dia.
Thrust: 98 N max.
Lead wire
3F88L-RS15W
Radial: 196 N max.
Radial: 98 N max.
101 mm
110 mm
154 mm
97 mm
Flange-mounting (Flange strength: 245 N) Servo-mount (mounting hooks included)
12 mN • m max.
49 to 147 mN • m
2.9 mN • m max.
Frequency range: 10 to 500 Hz
Total amplitude:
1.5 mm or 98 m/s2, whichever is less
Test time:
3 directions: X, Y, Z (2 hrs each)
2
4,900 m/s in X, Y, and Z directions, 3 times each
Drip-proof, oil-proof, IP52F (JEM)
5 kHz
10 V
10 minutes
3,000 r/min (Mechanical)
3F88L-RL10
Cable (3 m, end connector included)
3F88L-CRjjjC
Munsell 5Y3/1
--10 to 80°C
3F88L-RL6
Connector
3F88L-CRjjjNA
Munsell N1.5
Lead wire (350 mm)
3F88L-CRjjjSA
H Connection between Resolver and Cam Positioner
D Cam Positioner Connector
Use the Resolver Cable (sold separately) for connecting the Resolver to the Cam Positioner connector.
Using the Cable will eliminate soldering effort and improve noise immunity.
D-sub Connector
(15 pin)
(15-pin)
Viewed from the
wiring
i i side
id
6-4
Pin No. Signal name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S1 (sin+)
S3 (sin--)
FG
S2 (cos+)
S4 (cos --)
FG
-----
Cable color
on Resolver
side
Red
Black
Yellow
Blue
Pin No. Signal name
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
R1 (OUT+)
R2 (OUT--)
---------
Cable color
on Resolver
side
Red/White
Yellow/White
Specifications
Chapter 6
D 3F88L-RS15 Connector
RM15WTP-10S-(8)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal name
S1 (sin+)
S3 (sin--)
--S2 (cos+)
S4 (cos --)
--R1 (OUT+)
R2 (OUT--)
-----
D 3F88L-RS15W Resolver
Connect the lead wires to the 3F88L-CRjjjSA Resolver Cable.
Wire color
Red
Black
Yellow
Blue
Red/White
Yellow/White
Signal name
S1 (sin+)
S3 (sin--)
S2 (cos+)
S4 (cos --)
R1 (OUT+)
R2 (OUT--)
6-5
Specifications
6-3
Chapter 6
I/O Block Specifications
G7TC-OC16 I/O Block
H Specifications
Item
Resistive load (cosφ=1)
Rated load
Rated carry current
Maximum contact voltage
Maximum contact current
Maximum switching capacity
Minimum applicable load (P-level
reference value)
Coil load current (per one relay)
Electrical life expectancy
Mechanical life expectancy
Contact form
Contact resistance
Operating time
Release time
Maximum
Mechanical
switching
Rated load
frequency
Insulation resistance
Dielectric
Between coil and
strength
g
contact
Between
contacts of same
polarity
Between
connectors
Malfunction vibration resistance
Malfunction shock resistance
Noise immunity
Operating ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Tightening torque of external
connections
Coil surge absorption
Weight
5 A at 24 V DC, 2 A at 220 V AC
5A
250 V AC, 125 V DC
5A
120 W (DC), 440 V AC
10 mA at 5 V DC
6-6
Resistive load
(cosφ=0.4, L/R=7 ms)
2 A at 24 V DC, 1 A at 220 V AC
2A
48 W (DC), 220 V AC
Coil: 21 mA + LED: 4 mA
1,000,000 times
50,000,000 times
SPST-NO × 16
50 mΩ max.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
18,000 times/hour
1,800 times/hour
100 MΩ (at 500 V)
2,000 V AC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
1,000 V AC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
250 V AC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude of 1.0 mm
200 m/s2
Noise level: 1.5 kV, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 µs
0 to 55°C
35 to 85%
0.78 to 11.8 N • m
Diode (1 A, 400 V)
Approx. 670 g
Specifications
Chapter 6
H Internal Connection Diagram
Connect
or Pin
No.
G7T-1112S
Output
Relay
Screw
terminals
6-7
Specifications
6-4
Chapter 6
Display Specifications
M7E Digital Display
H Specifications
Item
Rated voltage
Current consumption (per display)
Input level
Positive logic
Operating ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Degree of protection
Compatible connector
Display accuracy
6-8
Specifications
Variable voltage between 12 and 24 V DC
Red LED: 35 mA max. (at 24 V DC)
45 mA max. (at 12 V DC)
Green LED: 40 mA max. (at 24 V DC)
55 mA max. (at 12 V DC)
H:
4 V to power supply voltage
L:
0 to 1.5 V
--10 to 55°C (with no icing)
35 to 85% (with no condensation)
--25 to 70°C (with no icing)
100 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC) between each terminal and mounting
panel
500 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and mounting
panel
Power terminal: ±500 V
Input terminals: ±500 V (normal mode)
±1,500 V (common mode)
10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm double amplitude
300 m/s2
IEC IP40 (portion on panel surface)
OMRON NRT-C/NRT-CP
5 r/min max.
Specifications
Chapter 6
H Terminal Arrangement
D Decimal/Hexadecimal Display
D Unit Display
Power (+)
Zero blanking
output
Zero blanking
input
Signal
input
Power (+)
Data
Decimal point
Latch
Power (0 V)
Power (0 V)
Note Values in circles apply to the NRT Connector’s pin numbers.
Terminal
symbol
V
PBO
PBI
A
B
C
D
DP
LE
G
Name
Function
Power supply
Positive side (+) power-supply terminal.
Zero blanking output The output will be open if PBI is open and the display is “0.”
The output will be 0V if PBI is 0V or if the display is other than “0.”
Zero blanking input
“0” will not be displayed if DP is open and PBI is open. If connected
to 0V, “0” will be displayed. If DP is set to 0V, the display will not be
affected by the state of PBI.
Data input
A (20)
Decimal/hexadecimal display
B (21)
• Displays a digit or symbol corresponding to the value of the binary code signal.
C (22)
• Decimal display uses 0 to 9; nothing will be displayed for higher values.
D (23)
Decimal point
The decimal point lights. Operates independently from the LE
terminal.
Latch
When this signal is present, the immediately preceding display
condition is retained.
Power supply
0 V power-supply (ground) input terminal (GND).
6-9
Specifications
Chapter 6
M7F Digital Display
H Specifications
Item
Rated voltage
Current consumption (per display)
Input level
Positive logic
Operating ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Degree of protection
Compatible connector
Display accuracy
Specifications
Variable voltage between 12 and 24 V DC
14 mm: 200 mA max. (at 12 V DC)
100 mA max. (at 24 V DC)
25 mm: 300 mA max. (at 12 V DC)
200 mA max. (at 24 V DC)
H:
4 V to power supply voltage
L:
0 to 1.5 V
--10 to 55°C (with no icing)
35 to 85% (with no condensation)
--25 to 70°C (with no icing)
100 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC) between each terminal and mounting
panel
1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and mounting
panel
Power terminal: ±500 V (normal mode)
Input terminals: ±1,500 V (common mode)
I/O cable:
±800 V (when the specified cable is used)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
300 m/s2
IEC IP40
OMRON XG5M-2035-N/XG5S-1001 or 2012
5 r/min max.
H Terminal Arrangement
Case
mark
Terminal
symbol
Name
A
B
C
D
Data input
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
Control input
+V
0V
Power supply
Power supply
6-10
Function
A (20)
B (21)
C (22)
D (23)
The numeral or symbol corresponding to the binary code
signal will be displayed.
S0 (100)
S1 (101)
S2 (102)
S3 (103)
S4 (104)
Designates the digit to be displayed. Each digit will
maintain the previous value when this signal is input.
Power supply and output terminal
Power supply 0-V output terminal (GND)
7
Chapter 7
Appendix
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Application Examples
Performance
Resolver Life Expectancy
Standard Models
Displays by Mode
Error Codes
Cam Programming Sheet
Parameter Settings Log Chart
Appendix
7-1
Chapter 7
Application Examples
H Reading Present Value Output Signals with an OMRON PC
D System Configuration
• Cam Positioner: 3F88L-160 (16-point type)
• Present angle value output setting (Function No. H, Parameter No. 4): “1” (4-digit present angle, no
units)
• CIO bits: a, b, c, d, e
• Data memory used to store present value data: D01000 (work), D01001 (present value data storage)
• Wire cam outputs 1 to 16 to IN0 to IN15 on the Input Unit allocated to word 0 in the PC.
Input Unit
Cam output
CAM16
Bit 15, word 0
CAM15
Bit 14, word 0
Display
data
CAM14
Bit 13, word 0
CAM13
Bit 12, word 0
CAM12 (1-digit LE signal)
Bit 11, word 0
CAM11 (2-digit LE signal)
Bit 10, word 0
CAM10 (3-digit LE signal)
Bit 9, word 0
CAM9 (4-digit LE signal)
Bit 8, word 0
CAM8 (Cam No. 8 output signal)
Bit 7, word 0
...
...
D Points to Consider
The 3F88L-160/162 Cam Positioner present value outputs have been adjusted to suit the M7E Display
Unit. The displayed data is, therefore, the reverse of the normal signal.
M7E display
Item
0
Display
p y data
CAM16 1
( i
(signal
l status)) CAM15 1
CAM14 1
CAM13 1
1
1
1
1
0
2
1
1
0
1
3
1
1
0
0
4
1
0
1
1
5
1
0
1
0
6
1
0
0
1
7
1
0
0
0
8
0
1
1
1
For
PRGM/SET
mode
9
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
If errors
occur
0
0
0
1
Note 1. On this table, “0” indicates OFF and “1” indicates ON.
Note 2. The data on this table is for 3F88L-160 Cam Positioners. For 3F88L-162 Cam Positioners,
CAM16 to 13 will be CAM32 to 29. (Refer to 3-6-10 Present Value Output Function.)
Note 3. In PRGM/SET mode, a code that gives “A” will be output when the bit is reversed (all digits).
The following cases, however, are exceptions to this rule.
During trial operation or teaching: The display data will be output according to the present value
output settings.
During origin compensation: Display data is output with the origin compensation absolute angle
flashing.
(For approximately one second, “the code (all digits) that will give “E” when origin compensation
absolute angle changed to bit reversal” will be repeatedly output.
7-2
Appendix
Chapter 7
Note 4. When an error occurs, a code that gives “E” will be output when the bit is reversed.
Note 5. For M7E Display Units, codes that give “A” to “F” when bits are reversed will not be displayed.
For M7F Display Units, however, “A” to “F” will be displayed.
D Ladder Program
Bit 11, word 0
Bit 10, word 0
Bit 9, word 0
Bit 8, word 0
Bit 11, word 0
7-3
Appendix
7-2
Chapter 7
Performance
This section shows the performance values of the Cam Positioner.
Note This performance data is for reference only and cannot be guaranteed.
H Initial Processing Time
The diagram shows the times from when the START input is turned ON and the power supply to the Cam
Positioner is turned ON until cam outputs, RUN outputs, and ERROR outputs are made.
Power supply
RUN output
Cam output
Enabled
Disabled
ERROR output
Data
RUN output delay time
Cam output delay time
ERROR output delay time
7-4
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Td3
Standard time
2 s max.
2 s max.
2 s max.
Appendix
Chapter 7
H Time from START Input to Start of Operation
The diagram shows the time from when the START input is turned ON until cam outputs can be controlled.
START input
RUN output
Enabled
Cam output Disabled
Data
RUN output
p delayy time
Cam output
p delayy time
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Td3
Td4
Standard time
10 ms max.
8 ms max.
10 ms max.
8 ms max.
H Origin Shift Processing Time
The diagram shows the time from when TRIG input is turned ON until cam outputs and RUN outputs
change.
TRIG input
RUN output
Cam output Enabled
Disabled
Data
RUN output delay time
RUN output OFF time
Cam output delay time
Cam output OFF time
Min. TRIG input enabled time
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Td3
Td4
Td5
Standard time
15 ms max.
0.8 to 1.2 s
15 ms max.
0.8 to 1.2 s
10 ms min.
7-5
Appendix
Chapter 7
H M-DET ON/OFF Time
The diagram shows the time from when the Resolver speed is greater or less than 4 r/min until the
M-DET output changes.
Resolver speed
M⋅DET output
Data
M-DET output ON delay time
M-DET output OFF delay time
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Standard time
100 ms max.
200 ms max.
H Bank Switching Time
The diagram shows the time taken to switch bank numbers during operation.
BANK input
RUN output
Cam output Enabled
Disabled
Data
RUN output delay time
RUN output OFF time
Cam output delay time
Cam output OFF time
7-6
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Td3
Td4
Standard time
10 ms max.
0.8 to 1.2 s
10 ms max.
0.8 to 1.2 s
Appendix
Chapter 7
H Cam Output Delay Time
The diagram shows the time taken while the Resolver is rotating from when the machinery arrives at the
position where the cam output turns ON (ON angle in the cam program) until the cam output is actually
turned ON.
ON angle reached
Machinery
position
Cam output
(CAM 1)
Cam output
(CAM 32)
Data
Cam 1 output delay time
Cam 32 output delay time
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Standard time
0.35 ms max.
0.35 ms max.
Note The times shown include all the following times.
S Time taken by the Cam Positioner to detect the Resolver angle.
S Time taken to perform various compensation processing.
S Time taken to change cam outputs according to the cam program.
H Differences between Cams
This diagram shows the differences between different cam outputs when the same cam program is set
for a different cam.
Cam output
(CAM 1)
Cam output
(CAM 32)
Data
ON time difference
OFF time difference
Symbol
Td1
Td2
Standard time
--10 to 10 µs
--10 to 10 µs
7-7
Appendix
7-3
Chapter 7
Resolver Life Expectancy
This section shows the life expectancy of the Resolver and couplings.
Note This performance data is for reference only and cannot be guaranteed.
H Resolvers
The life of the Resolver is determined by the life of the Resolver axle bearings.
Life expectancy for rated wear (h)
D 3F88L-RS17/RS17T Resolvers (Axle End Load: Radial and Thrust both 19.6 N)
Speed (r/min)
Life expectancy for rated wear (h)
D 3F88L-RS15/RS15W Resolvers (Axle End Load: Radial and Thrust both 19.6 N)
Speed (r/min)
7-8
Appendix
Chapter 7
H Couplings
The life expectancy of couplings is determined by tightening torque, bend angle, and axle core displacement volume.
Rotation life expectancy (No. of rotations)
D Tightening Torque and Rotation Life
Tightening torque (%)
Note Tightening torque is given as a percentage of allowable tightening torque. (Refer to 2-2-3 Mounting the Resolver.)
Rotation life expectancy (No. of rotations)
D Bend Angle and Rotation Life
Bend angle (%)
Note Bend angles are given as a percentage of allowable bend angles. (Refer to 2-2-3 Mounting the
Resolver.)
7-9
Appendix
Chapter 7
Rotation life expectancy (No. of rotations)
D Axle Core Displacement and Rotation Life
Axle core displacement (%)
Note Axle core displacement is given as a percentage of allowable axle core displacement. (Refer to
2-2-3 Mounting the Resolver.)
7-10
Appendix
7-4
Chapter 7
Standard Models
Product name
Cam Positioner
Resolver
I/O Block
Display
p y Unit
Specifications
16-point type
32-point type
Large-diameter type
High-torque type
Connector type
Lead type
16-point relay unit
Numeric display
p y
2m
5m
10 m
20 m
50 m
3m
5m
10 m
15 m
20 m
3m
5m
10 m
0.5 m
1m
1m
Model
3F88L-160
3F88L-162
3F88L-RS17
3F88L-RS17T
3F88L-RS15
3F88L-RS15W
G7TC-OC16
M7E-01DRD2 (red, decimal)
M7E-01DGD2 (green, decimal)
M7E-01UR2-V (red, r/min)
M7E-01UG2-V (green, r/min)
M7E-01UR2-A (red, no display)
M7E-01UG2-A (green, no display)
M7F-4D1R (red)
M7F-4D1G (green)
M7F-4D1RT (red)
M7F-4D1GT (green)
M7F-1 (not displayed)
M7F-RPM-1 (r/min)
M7F-4D2R (red)
M7F-4D2G (green)
M7F-4D2RT (red)
M7F-4D2GT green)
M7F-2 (not displayed)
M7F-RPM-2 (r/min)
3F88L-CR002C
3F88L-CR005C
3F88L-CR010C
3F88L-CR020C
3F88L-CR050C
3F88L-CR003NA
3F88L-CR005NA
3F88L-CR010NA
3F88L-CR015NA
3F88L-CR020NA
3F88L-CR003SA
3F88L-CR005SA
3F88L-CR010SA
3F88L-CG0R5N
3F88L-CG001N
3F88L-CG001S
3m
3F88L-CG003S
Units display
p y
4-digit
g numeral display,
p y,
character
h
height
h i h off 14 mm
4-digit
g numeral display
p y + units,,
character
h
height
h i h off 14 mm
Units nameplate,
p
, character
h i h off 14 mm
height
4-digit
g numeral display,
p y,
character
h
height
h i h off 25 mm
4-digit
g numeral display
p y + units,,
character
h
height
h i h off 25 mm
Unit nameplate,
p
, character
h i h off 25 mm
height
Resolver Extension Cable (for
(
3F88L-RS17/17T
F L RS / T Resolvers)
R
l
)
With connectors at
b h ends
both
d
Resolver Cable (for
( 3F88L-RS15
R
Resolvers)
l
)
With connectors at
b h ends
both
d
Resolver Cable (for
(
3F88L-RS15W
F L RS W Resolvers)
R
l
)
With connector at
one end
d
Cam Output
p Cable (for
(
connection
i to I/O Block)
Bl k)
With connectors at
b h ends
both
d
Cam Output Cable (for
connection to other devices and
Display Units)
With connector at
one end
7-11
Appendix
7-5
Chapter 7
Displays by Mode
D SET Mode
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
1 to 8
0
Origin
(1 to 4)
compensation
((see note 2))
absolute angle
1 to 32
Program
(1 to 16)
number
(see note 1)
checking
A (a)
b (b)
1
Resolution
selection
Data range
-----
0, 1
1
Origin
compensation
value
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
2
Backlash
compensation
value
0 to 179
(0 to 359)
(see note 2)
3
Advance angle
compensation
value 1
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
4
Advance angle
compensation
value 2
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 2)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
SPEED/ON
Displays the
absolute angle for
origin compensation.
Displays the number
of steps for the
displayed bank or
cam number.
0: 360 divisions/
revolution (factory
setting)
1: 720 divisions/
revolution
Sets origin
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets backlash
compensation value
(angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
Sets speed data for
advance angle
compensation value
2.
Factory setting “0.”
---
5
Advance angle
compensation
value 3
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 2)
---
6
Baud rate
1, 2
1: 9,600 bps (factory
setting)
2: 19,200 bps
7-12
POSITION/OFF
-----
---
---
---
---
Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
1.
Factory setting “0.”
---
Sets angle data for
advance angle value
2.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets angle data for
advance angle
compensation value
3 (advance angle
compensated
position).
Factory setting “0.”
---
Appendix
Chapter 7
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
--Cam protect
c (c)
Data range
---
d (d)
---
Teaching
---
F (f)
---
One-direction
function setting
0 to 2
SPEED/ON
POSITION/OFF
Protection can be set
or released for each
cam number or for
all cams in a bank
number.
(Factory setting:
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as ON angle data.
---
Protect can be set or
released for each
cam number or for
all cams in a bank
number (Factory
setting
“unprotected”)
Present Resolver
angle can be input
as OFF angle data.
0: One-direction
function disabled
(factory setting)
1: Enabled in
forward direction
H (h)
1
2
3
Backlash
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Advance angle
compensation
enable/disable
setting
Output hold
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0: Backlash
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Backlash
compensation
enabled
0: Advance angle
compensation
disabled (factory
setting)
1: Advance angle
compensation
enabled
0: Output hold
disabled (factory
setting)
2: Enabled in
reverse direction
---
---
---
1: Output hold
enabled
7-13
Appendix
Chapter 7
Bank/Func- Cam/ParameFunction
tion
ter
4
Present value
H (h)
output setting
Data range
0 to 4
SPEED/ON
0: No present value
output function
(factory setting)
POSITION/OFF
---
1: 4-digit present
angle (no units)
2: 4-digit number of
rotations (no
units)
3: Automatic
switching of 3-digit
present angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
P (p)
(see note 4)
---
Pulse output
setting
---
t (t)
(see note 4)
0
Data transfer
(Slave setting)
---
1
Data transfer
0 to 3
(Master setting)
4: Automatic
switching of 4-digit
present angle and
number of
rotations (with
units)
Writes pulse output
program to any bank
or cam number (sets
pulse number).
(Operates on a
command issued
from Master Unit.)
0: Disabled (factory
setting)
(Sets pulse start
position.)
-----
1: Read data
2: Write data
U (u)
1
Function level
selection
0 to 2
3: Verify data
0: Function level 0
(monitor only)
---
1: Function level 1
(basic
operation/monitor
only) (factory
setting)
---
---
Error display
---
2: Function level 2
(all functions)
E--** (error display)
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
Note 3. Functions A, b, C, F, H, and U will be enabled after the power has been turned OFF and then
ON again.
Note 4. Functions P and t are special operations that are not stored as parameters.
7-14
Appendix
Chapter 7
D RUN Mode
Bank/Function
1 to 8
( to 4)) (see
(1
(
note 2))
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
o (o)
( )
---
Cam/Parameter
Start input
OFF
ON
ON
--ru (rU)
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
1
--2
-------
SPEED/ON
Number of Resolver
rotations
i
(r/min)
(/ i )
POSITION/OFF
Present angle
g
Compensation operation ON angle
Cam output monitor
Control I/O monitor
E--** (error display)
Compensation operation OFF angle
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
D PRGM Mode
Bank/Function
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
1 to 8
(1 to 4) (see note 2)
---
Cam/Parameter
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
1 to 32
(1 to 16) (see note 1)
---
SPEED/ON
ON angle
POSITION/OFF
OFF angle
“t (t)” + ON angle (trial
operation)
E--** (error display)
OFF angle (trial
operation)
---
Note 1. The data for the 3F88L-160 (16-point model) Cam Positioner is shown in parentheses.
Note 2. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
7-15
Appendix
7-6
Chapter 7
Error Codes
Note The “F” mark in the cam output column indicates that cam outputs are turned OFF regardless of
the output hold settings. The “f” mark indicates that if output hold is set, the output status immediately before the error was generated will be maintained. If output hold is not set, cam outputs will
be turned OFF. (Refer to 3-6-9 Output Hold Function for information.)
Error
code
E-00
E-01
Error name
Hardware
failure
Power
interruption
during
programming
Description
Memory
read/write
check error
when power
turned ON.
Cam
Probable
output
cause
Malfunction
F
due to noise
(system
recovers when
power is
turned ON
again.)
Power turned F
OFF while
program being
edited.
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
Power turned
OFF while
program being
edited.
RESET input
turned ON
while program
being edited.
RESET input
turned ON due
to noise while
program
being
p
g
g
edited.
di d
7-16
Possible solution
Check if noise has
been generated
when or after the
power was turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Error reset
method
Turn the
power ON
again.
---
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Then re-input
p
the cam
program.
Appendix
Error
code
E-02
Chapter 7
Error name
Description
Power failure
during write to
non-volatile
memory
Power turned
OFF during
data save to
non-volatile
memory.
Cam
Probable
output
cause
Power turned
F
OFF while
writing to
memory.
RESET input
turned ON
while writing to
memory.
RESET input
turned ON due
to noise while
writing
g to
memory.
E-10
E-11
Resolver
disconnection
error
Sum check
error in
program
memory
Resolver cable F
disconnected
during
teaching
g or
trial
i l operation
i
in RUN mode
or error in
Resolver
interface
circuit.
Memory sum
check error
when power
turned ON.
F
Resolver
connector has
been
disconnected.
Resolver
connector
connection
imperfect.
Resolver cable
disconnected.
Resolver
detection
circuit error.
Malfunction
due to noise
(system
recovers when
power is
turned ON
again.)
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
Possible solution
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Check that the
Resolver connector
is connected
securely.
y
Replace the
Resolver cable.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Check if noise has
been generated
when or after the
power was turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Error reset
method
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Then re-input
p
the cam
program.
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
p
Cl
Clear
Key
K to
clear the error.
--Turn ON the
power again.
---
7-17
Appendix
Error
code
E-12
E-13
Error name
System
program sum
check error
Memory error
E-22
Cam data
protect input
prohibited
E-23
Cam program
duplication
error
7-18
Chapter 7
Description
Cam
Probable
output
cause
System
Malfunction
F
program sum
due to noise
check error
(system
when power
recovers when
turned ON.
power is
turned ON
again.)
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
Access to
Write to
f
non-volatile
non-volatile
memory not
memory not
completed
completed due
within set time.
to noise.
Read from
non-volatile
memory not
completed due
to noise.
Attempt made f
Attempt made
to edit
to edit
cam-protected
cam-protected
cam data.
cam data.
Attempt made f
to write
program to the
ON section of
an existing
program
(including
attempt with
the teaching
function)
Possible solution
Check if noise
occurs when or after
the power is turned
ON and take
appropriate
countermeasures
against the noise.
Replace the Cam
Positioner.
Find the source of
the error and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Find the source of
the error and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Once the error has
been cleared, either
remove the cam data
protect, or edit
different cam data
that has not been
cam data protected.
Attempt made Once the error has
to write
been cleared, write
program to the the correct steps that
ON section of are not duplicated.
an existing
program
(including
attempt with
the teaching
function)
Error reset
method
Turn ON the
power again.
---
Change to
PRGM or SET
mode and
press the
Clear Keyy to
clear the error.
Press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Appendix
Error
code
E-31
E-33
Error name
Communications error
Verification
error
Chapter 7
Description
Cam
Probable
output
cause
No response
Different baud
f
from the Slave
rate to Slave
Unit; commuUnit.
nications data
error; different
diff
Slave Unit not
baud rate to
operating.
Slave.
Slave and
Master data
do not match.
f
Possible solution
Error reset
method
Press the
Clear Key to
clear the error.
Align the Master and
Slave Unit baud
rates (Function No.
b, Parameter No. 6).
Check the display on
the Slave Unit
(Bank/Function
display: “t”;
Cam/Parameter
display: “0”) and
re-transmit the data
from the Master Unit.
Slave Unit
Clear the errors on
error.
both the Master and
Slave Units and
re-transmit the data.
Slave Unit not Check the display on
in communica- the Slave Unit
tions mode.
(Bank/Function
display: “t”;
Cam/Parameter
display: “0”) and
re-transmit the data
from the Master Unit.
CommunicaCheck and adjust the
tions cable
communications
wired incorcable wiring.
rectly.
Press the
Different
Check that the cam
Clear Key to
programs or
program and
clear the error.
parameters
parameters are
are verified.
correct for each Cam
Positioner.
Data corrupted Find the source of
due to noise
the noise and take
during comappropriate
munications.
countermeasures.
7-19
Appendix
Error
code
(Error
indicator not
lit)
Error name
Power OFF
watchdog
error
Chapter 7
Description
Power is not
turned ON;
RESET input
has been
turned ON;
software error
Cam
Probable
output
cause
Power has
F
turned OFF.
RESET input
has been
turned ON.
RESET input
has been
turned ON due
to noise.
The Cam
Positioner is
malfunctioning
(system does
not recover
when power is
turned ON
again.)
7-20
Possible solution
Check that the
voltage supplied to
the Cam Positioner
meets the
specifications (85 to
264 V AC) and
adjust if necessary.
Adjust the RESET
input sequence.
Error reset
method
Turn ON the
power again.
Find the source of
the noise and take
appropriate
countermeasures.
Check and adjust the
wiring for control
input signals.
Replace the Cam
--Positioner.
Appendix
7-7
Chapter 7
Cam Programming Sheet
Machine Name
Cam
N
No.
Signal
g
name
Adjusted
(date)
Time chart
ON
OFF
angle
l
angle
l
0
30
60
(0)
90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360
7-21
Appendix
7-8
Chapter 7
Parameter Settings Log Chart
D Unit Model
Cam Positioner
j3F88L-160
(16-point model)
j3F88L-162
(32-point model)
Remarks:
D Switch Setting
CW/CCW setting switch
jCW
jCCW
D Parameter Settings
FUN
No.
U (u)
A (a)
b (b)
PRMTR
No.
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-22
Function
Function
level
selection
Resolution
selection
Origin
compensation value
Backlash
compensation value
Advance
angle compensation
p
value 1
Advance
angle compensation
p
value 2
Advance
angle compensation
value 3
Baud rate
Function
level for
settings
Setting
range
0 to 2
Settings
0: Function level 0 (monitor
only)
0 1 2
1: Function level 1 (basic
operation/monitor only)
1 2
2: Function level 2 (all
functions)
0: 360 divisions/ revolution
(factory setting)
0, 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 1)
0 to 179
(0 to 359)
(see note 1)
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 1)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 1)
0 to 1600
(0 to 800)
(see note 1)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 1)
0 to 359
(0 to 719)
(see note 1)
1, 2
1: 720 divisions/ revolution
Sets origin compensation
value (angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets backlash compensation
value (angle data).
Factory setting “0.”
Sets speed data for advance
angle compensation value 1.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets angle data for advance
angle compensation value 1.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets speed data for advance
angle compensation value 2.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets angle data for advance
angle value 2.
Factory setting “0.”
Sets angle data for advance
angle compensation value 3
(advance angle compensated
position).
Factory setting “0.”
1: 9,600 bps (factory setting)
2: 19,200 bps
Settings
Settings when
parameter setting
is made.
Settings when
machine is
operating.
Appendix
FUN
No.
H (h)
PRMTR
No.
1
2
3
4
Chapter 7
Function
Backlash
compensation
enable/disable setting
Advance
angle compensation
enable/disable setting
Output
hold
Function
level for
settings
Setting
range
0, 1
Settings
0: Backlash compensation
disabled (factory setting)
1: Backlash compensation
enabled
2
0, 1
2
0: Advance angle
compensation disabled
(factory setting)
1: Advance angle
compensation enabled
0, 1
2
Present
value
output
setting
Settings
0 to 4
0: Output hold disabled
(factory setting)
1: Output hold enabled
0: No present value output
function (factory setting)
1: 4-digit present angle (no
units)
2: 4-digit number of rotations
(no units)
2
3: Automatic switching of
3-digit present angle and
number of rotations (with
units)
4: Automatic switching of
4-digit present angle and
number of rotations (with
units)
Note 1. The data for 720 resolution (divisions/revolution) is shown in parentheses. The angles will be
set and displayed as “1” for 0.5°.
Note 2. The power must be turned OFF and then ON again to enable these functions.
7-23
Appendix
Chapter 7
D Cam Protect Settings (Function No. C (c), Function Level: 2 )
f: Cam protect
Bank No. 1
Fill in the bit corresponding to the cam number
for which cam data protect has been set.
This makes it easier to display and compare
the cam data protect statuses.
Bank No. 1
Bank No. 2
Bank No. 2
Bank No. 3
Bank No. 3
Bank No. 4
Bank No. 4
Bank No. 5
Bank No. 5
Bank No. 6
Bank No. 6
Bank No. 7
Bank No. 7
Bank No. 8
Bank No. 8
Note The power must be turned OFF and then ON again to enable this function.
7-24
Appendix
Chapter 7
Cam Protect Status Display
• SPEED/ON
• POSITION/OFF
7-25
Appendix
Chapter 7
D One-direction Function Setting (Function No. F (f), Function Level: 2 )
0: One-direction function disabled (factory setting)
1: Forward direction function enabled
2: Reverse direction enabled
Bank No. 1
Bank No. 2
Bank No. 3
Bank No. 4
Bank No. 5
Bank No. 6
Bank No. 7
Bank No. 8
Note The power must be turned OFF and then ON again to enable this function.
7-26
Index
Numbers
4-digit display, wiring, 2-27
A, B
command frame, 4-5–4-6
commands, FINS commands, 4-10
communications
CompoWay/F communications, 4-1–4-28
specifications, 4-3
communications error, 3-92, 5-7–5-8
adjustment operation, 3-93
communications ports, RS-232C connections, 3-88
advance angle compensation, 3-62
and teaching, 3-87
components, name and function of each part, 1-7
angle resolution, 1-2
applied functions, 1-4, 1-12, 3-44–3-96
backlash compensation, 3-60–3-62
and teaching, 3-87
bank number
bank selection inputs, 3-42
deleting programs by bank number, 3-34
switching time, 7-6
bank selection inputs, 3-42
baud rate setting, 3-90
C
cam number, deleting program by cam number, 3-33
cam output
cam output function, 1-3
delay time, 7-4, 7-7
monitoring, 3-41
OFF time, 7-5
specifications, 2-25
wiring, 2-22
Cam Positioner
installation, 2-6
replacement, 5-13
RS-232C connections, 3-88
specifications, 6-2
standard models, 7-11
cam program
cam programming sheet, 7-21
checking in PRGM mode, 3-24, 3-31–3-32
checking number of steps, 3-26, 3-35–3-37
creating and checking, 3-24–3-36
creation in PRGM mode, 3-24, 3-27–3-30
deleting, 3-32
write function, 1-3
cam protect error, 3-92
cam protect function, 3-69–3-75
cam protect settings, 7-24
chains, using, 2-12
colors, cam output cable colors, 2-24
CompoWay/F Communications
commands, 4-10
Controller Data Read command, 4-19
Controller Status Read command, 4-20
errors, 5-7–5-8
Internode Echo Test command, 4-22
Memory Area Read command, 4-10
Operation Command, 4-21
overview, 4-2–4-4
Parameter Area Read command, 4-12
Unit Attribute Read command, 4-20
Connection Cables, models, 2-14
connections, wiring connections, 2-13
connectors, functions, 1-9
control inputs
description, 3-42–3-43
monitoring, 3-41
specifications, 2-19
wiring, 2-17
control outputs
description, 3-43
monitoring, 3-41
specifications, 2-20
wiring, 2-19
copy function, 1-5, 3-88–3-92
Coupling. See Resolver Coupling
crimp terminals, recommended terminals, 2-18, 2-20
CW/CCW setting switch, using, 3-21
D
data output timing, 3-80
data transfer, 3-88
deleting cam program, 3-32
deleting all cam programs, 3-35
in PRGM mode, 3-25
direction of rotation
one-direction function, 3-75
setting, 3-21
I-1
Index
display
display changes in SET mode, 3-52–3-56
displays by mode, 3-8, 7-12–7-15
functions, 1-8
nomenclature of display section, 3-2
seven-segment display patterns, 3-3
specifications, 6-8
Display Unit
connecting, 2-5, 2-13, 2-25–2-29
standard models, 7-11
E
EC Directives, conformance, 2-9, 2147483647f
environmental conditions, 2-8
I, J, K
I/O Block
cam outputs for, 2-23
connecting, 2-4, 2-13
specifications, 6-6–6-7
standard models, 7-11
I/O monitor function, 3-40
initial settings
descriptions, 3-21–3-23
functions, 1-4
inspection, regular inspections, 5-12
installation, 2-6
Cam Positioners, 2-6
environmental conditions, 2-8
precautions, 2147483647f
Resolvers, 2-7
error codes, 5-2–5-7, 7-16–7-20
internode echo test, 4-22
error output, 3-43
delay time, 7-4
keys. See operation keys
errors
communications errors, 3-92
diagnosing with error codes, 5-2–5-6
displaying, 3-40
error codes, 5-2–5-7, 7-16–7-20
error codes in FINS response frames, 4-8
error output, 3-43
examples, application examples, 7-2–7-3
F
M, N
M-DET output
OFF delay time, 7-6
ON delay time, 7-6
maintenance, 5-12
Master Cam Positioner Settings, 3-91
modes, 1-3, 3-4–3-11
changing, 3-4
monitoring operation, 3-40
noise, wiring to reduce noise, 2-14
FINS communications. See CompoWay/F communications
function level, selecting, 3-44–3-45
function level 0, selecting, 3-14
function level 1
selecting, 3-14
using, 1-11, 3-12
function level 2
selecting, 3-14
using, 1-12, 3-13
functions
basic functions, 1-3
by mode, 3-4
functions allowed in each function level, 3-14–3-20
program functions, 3-24–3-26
O
one-direction function, 3-75–3-77
settings, 7-26
operation
basic operation, 1-2
nomenclature of operation section, 3-2
procedure, 1-11, 3-12–3-13
operation keys, 1-9
functions in PRGM mode, 3-28
origin compensation, 3-56–3-59
and origin shift, 3-38
executing, 3-37–3-38, 3-58
origin compensation absolute angle, 3-58
origin compensation value, 3-57
gears, using, 2-12
origin shift, 3-56–3-59
and origin compensation, 3-38
executing, 3-59
origin shift input, 3-43
processing time, 7-5
glossary, glossary of terms, 1-10
output hold function, 3-77–3-78
host computer, communications with, 4-2
output timing, data output timing, 3-80
G, H
I-2
Index
P
parameters
advance angle compensation values, 3-62, 3-67–3-69
backlash compensation enable/disable, 3-61, 3-69
backlash compensation value, 3-60
baud rate setting, 3-90
cam protect settings, 3-70
data transfer (Master Unit settings), 3-90
data transfer (Slave Unit settings), 3-90
displaying and setting, 3-50
explanation and operation, 3-49–3-55
log chart, 7-22
one-direction function setting, 3-75
origin compensation absolute angle, 3-58
origin compensation value, 3-57
output hold, 3-77
parameter list, 3-45
present value output setting, 3-78
pulse output setting, 3-81
reading parameter area, 4-12
teaching setting, 3-83
parts, name and function of each part, 1-7
performance, 7-4
peripheral devices, reducing noise, 2-15
personal computer, communications with, 4-2
PMCR instruction, 4-24
power supply, wiring, 2-16
precautions
general, 2147483647c
safety, 2147483647c
present angle
displaying, 2-5, 2-28
monitoring, 3-40
reading from OMRON PC, 7-2
present value output, 3-78–3-80
PRGM mode
displays, 3-11
function, 1-3
procedure, operation procedure, 3-12
reset input, 3-43
resolution, 1-2
setting, 3-22
Resolver
Cables, 2-3
connecting, 2-3, 2-13
connection to machinery, 3-37
installation, 2-7
life expectancy, 7-8
mounting, 2-9
specifications, 6-4–6-5
standard models, 7-11
wiring, 2-21
Resolver Cables, 2-22, 6-4
Resolver Coupling
connecting with, 2-10
life expectancy, 7-9
precautions, 2-11
replacement, 5-12
specifications, 2-10
Resolver speed
displaying, 2-28
monitoring, 3-40
response frame, 4-7–4-10
rotation detection output, 3-43
rotation direction, setting, 3-21
RS-232C Cables
Cam Positioner connections, 3-88
connection to a PC or host computer, 4-3
specifications, 4-4
RUN mode
displays, 3-11
function, 1-3
starting operation, 3-38–3-39
RUN output, 3-43
delay time, 7-4
OFF time, 7-5
S
processing time, 7-4
safety measures, 2-2
program. See cam program
SET mode
displays, 3-8
function, 1-3
selecting the function level, 3-20
program functions, outline, 3-24
Programmable Controller
communications with, 4-2
connecting, 2-13
reading present value output from, 7-2
protocol macros , executing CompoWay/F commands with, 4-23
pulse output function, 3-80–3-83
R
relay output, 2-4
Slave Cam Positioner Settings, 3-91
specifications, 6-1–6-10
cam output, 2-25
Cam Positioner, 6-2
communications, 4-3
control inputs, 2-19
control outputs, 2-20
display, 6-8
I/O Block, 6-6
Resolver, 2-2, 6-4
Resolver Coupling, 2-10
I-3
Index
speed
monitoring Resolver speed, 3-40
permissible resolver speed, 1-2
standard models, 7-11
start input, 3-42
start operation, 3-38
steps
checking number of program steps, 3-26, 3-35–3-37
deleting by steps, 3-32
switches
functions, 1-8
location, 1-7
system configuration, 1-6
system design, 2-2
timing belt, using, 2-12
timing compensation, 3-63
transferring cam programs and parameters, 3-91
transistor output, open collector, 2-4
trial operation, 3-93
troubleshooting, 5-9–5-11
U, V, W
unpacking, 0
verification error, 3-92
warnings, general, 2147483647c
terminal block, function, 1-9
wiring, 2-13
4-digit display, 2-27
cam output, 2-22
control inputs, 2-17
control outputs, 2-19
power supply input, 2-16
Resolver, 2-21
standard method, 2-14
Terminal Blocks, 2-16
terminals, 2-18, 2-20
write-protection, write-protecting cam data, 3-69
T
teaching function, 3-83–3-87
Terminal Block, wiring, 2-16
time chart, example, 3-27
timing, data output timing, 3-80
I-4
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. O008-E1-1
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
1
September 1999
Revised content
Original production
R-1
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173 USA
800.55.OMRON (66766)
OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8
416.286.6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - http://www.omron.com
USA - http://www.omron.com/oei
Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci
800.55.OMRON or 847.843.7900
Sao Paulo
55.11.5564.6488
Buenos Aires
54.114.787.1129
Florida
954.227.2121
O008-E1-1
©2001 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Mouser Electronics
Authorized Distributor
Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information:
Omron:
3F88L-CG001N 3F88L-CG001S 3F88L-CG003S 3F88L-CR002C 3F88L-CR003NA 3F88L-CR005C 3F88LCR005NA 3F88L-CR010NA 3F88L-CR010SA 3F88L-CR020C 3F88L-CR050C 3F88L-RL10 3F88L-RS15 3F88LRS15W